1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
46 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
47 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
49 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
51 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
52 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
64 \font_typewriter default
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
73 \default_output_format default
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 0
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation indent
133 \paragraph_indentation default
134 \quotes_language english
137 \paperpagestyle default
138 \tracking_changes false
139 \output_changes false
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
162 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
173 \begin_inset Newline newline
177 \begin_inset Newline newline
181 \begin_inset Note Note
184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
185 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
199 \begin_layout Standard
200 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
201 LatexCommand tableofcontents
208 \begin_layout Chapter
212 \begin_layout Section
216 \begin_layout Standard
217 LyX is a document preparation system.
218 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
219 scripts, publishable books, business
220 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
221 It is unlike most other
222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
229 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
231 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
247 pt type, left justified, 5
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
256 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
260 \begin_layout Standard
261 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
266 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
270 \begin_layout Standard
275 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
276 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
277 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
278 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
284 manual describes that, too.
287 \begin_layout Section
291 \begin_layout Standard
292 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
294 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
295 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
301 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
302 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
304 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
305 only a vertical scrollbar.
306 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
307 The first case is large images.
308 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
309 image and use the option
315 LaTeX and LyX options
318 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
320 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
321 this doesn't work for equations yet.
324 \begin_layout Standard
325 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
333 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
340 \begin_layout Section
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
346 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
347 Just select the manual you want to read from the
354 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
358 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
368 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
372 \begin_inset Index idx
375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
381 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
382 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
383 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
385 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
386 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
391 \begin_inset space \space{}
394 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
395 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
397 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
401 \begin_inset Index idx
404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 Reconfiguration of LyX
410 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
413 \begin_layout Section
415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
417 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
424 \begin_layout Standard
425 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
426 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
428 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
429 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
436 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
437 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
440 \begin_layout Standard
441 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
442 you can view from the menu
444 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
463 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
464 reconfigure LyX (menu
466 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
470 \begin_inset Note Note
473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
474 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
482 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
483 More about TeX Code is described in section
488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
490 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
494 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
501 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
511 \begin_inset Index idx
514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
515 Reconfiguration of LyX
520 See section 5.1 of the
524 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
527 \begin_layout Chapter
531 \begin_layout Section
532 Basic File Operations
533 \begin_inset Index idx
536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
545 \begin_layout Standard
550 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
551 in addition to some more advanced operations:
554 \begin_layout Itemize
576 \begin_layout Itemize
592 arg "buffer-new-template"
598 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
630 \begin_layout Itemize
644 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
678 arg "buffer-write-as"
684 \begin_layout Itemize
698 \begin_layout Itemize
706 arg "dialog-show print"
714 arg "dialog-show print"
720 \begin_layout Itemize
734 \begin_layout Standard
735 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
736 a few minor differences.
739 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
750 command lists the available templates.
751 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
752 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
753 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
761 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
768 \begin_layout Standard
769 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
801 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
802 space is just that — a big, blank space.
810 \begin_layout Standard
831 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
836 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
838 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
856 will reload the document from disk.
857 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
858 and want to restore it to the last save.
867 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
868 them as your changes.
871 \begin_layout Section
872 Basic Editing Features
873 \begin_inset Index idx
876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
885 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
892 \begin_layout Standard
893 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
894 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
895 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
896 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
898 We will start with cut and paste.
901 \begin_layout Standard
902 As you might expect, the
906 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
907 various other editing features.
908 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
912 \begin_layout Itemize
918 \begin_inset Index idx
921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
950 \begin_layout Itemize
956 \begin_inset Index idx
959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
988 \begin_layout Itemize
994 \begin_inset Index idx
997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1022 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_layout Itemize
1036 \begin_inset space ~
1042 \begin_layout Itemize
1046 \begin_inset space ~
1050 \begin_inset space ~
1056 \begin_inset Index idx
1059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1068 \begin_inset Index idx
1071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1086 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1096 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1103 The first three are self-explanatory.
1104 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1125 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1126 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1131 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1132 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1133 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1134 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1135 into individual cells.
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1144 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1145 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1149 \begin_layout Standard
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1158 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1160 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1161 \begin_inset space ~
1168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1174 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1175 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1176 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space \space{}
1185 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1186 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1189 \begin_inset space ~
1192 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1202 \begin_inset space ~
1211 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1212 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1214 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1223 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1224 start a new paragraph.
1225 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1233 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1250 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1253 paste from the primary selection.
1254 This is normally the currently selected text.
1257 \begin_layout Standard
1260 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1266 \begin_inset space ~
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1278 \begin_inset space ~
1284 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1289 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 button to skip the current word.
1310 \begin_inset space ~
1315 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1319 \begin_inset space ~
1324 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1326 If the toggle is set, searching for
1327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1338 will not match the word
1339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 Match whole words only
1355 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1384 LyX offers also an advanced
1387 \begin_inset space ~
1391 \begin_inset space ~
1396 feature that is described in sec.
1397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1403 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1410 \begin_layout Standard
1411 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1412 \begin_inset space \space{}
1416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1424 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1426 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1431 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1438 \begin_layout Standard
1439 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1442 arg "inset-select-all"
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document.
1454 \begin_layout Section
1456 \begin_inset Index idx
1459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1466 \begin_inset Index idx
1469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1478 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in LyX.
1554 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1558 \begin_layout Section
1560 \begin_inset Index idx
1563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1572 \begin_layout Standard
1573 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1576 \begin_layout Enumerate
1581 \begin_layout Itemize
1586 once anywhere in the edit window.
1587 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1591 \begin_layout Enumerate
1596 \begin_layout Itemize
1602 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1605 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1608 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1611 \begin_layout Itemize
1612 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1614 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1621 \begin_layout Enumerate
1622 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1628 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1632 \begin_layout Section
1634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1636 name "sec:Navigating"
1641 \begin_inset Index idx
1644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1653 \begin_layout Standard
1654 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1663 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1666 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1669 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1671 \begin_inset space ~
1676 or by the toolbar button
1679 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1685 \begin_layout Itemize
1686 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1688 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1691 and use the same menu to return to them.
1692 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1695 \begin_layout Standard
1699 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1704 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1705 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1707 \begin_inset space ~
1712 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1713 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1714 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1715 your last editing position.
1718 \begin_layout Standard
1723 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1726 \begin_layout Subsection
1728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1730 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1737 \begin_layout Standard
1738 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1739 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1740 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1748 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1752 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1759 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1764 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1770 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1771 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1772 dialog and to modify the citation.
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1776 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1778 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1779 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1787 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1792 you further to control the display.
1797 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1798 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1804 option keeps it in the current view state.
1805 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1806 \begin_inset space ~
1809 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1810 \begin_inset space ~
1813 3, the subsections of sections
1814 \begin_inset space ~
1817 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1822 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1823 \begin_inset space ~
1827 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1837 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1840 \begin_layout Standard
1842 \begin_inset space \space{}
1846 \begin_inset Graphics
1847 filename ../images/reload.png
1852 \begin_inset space ~
1855 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1856 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1859 \begin_inset space \space{}
1863 \begin_inset Graphics
1864 filename ../images/down.png
1866 groupId toolbarbuttons
1871 \begin_inset space ~
1875 \begin_inset space \space{}
1879 \begin_inset Graphics
1880 filename ../images/up.png
1882 groupId toolbarbuttons
1887 \begin_inset space ~
1890 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1891 So, for example, you can move section
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1896 \begin_inset space ~
1899 2.4 or after section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1906 \begin_inset Graphics
1907 filename ../images/promote.png
1909 groupId toolbarbuttons
1914 \begin_inset Graphics
1915 filename ../images/demote.png
1917 groupId toolbarbuttons
1921 (or the corresponding key bindings
1929 ) you can change the level of sections.
1930 So you can for example make section
1931 \begin_inset space ~
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \begin_layout Section
1946 Input/Word Completion
1947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1949 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1954 \begin_inset Index idx
1957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1964 \begin_inset Index idx
1967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1998 \begin_layout Standard
1999 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2001 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2002 is used to propose completions.
2005 \begin_layout Standard
2006 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2008 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2013 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2020 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_inset space ~
2029 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2033 \begin_inset space ~
2038 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2039 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2043 \begin_inset space ~
2049 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2050 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2055 are completions available.
2060 key to accept a proposed completion.
2061 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2062 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2063 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2070 \begin_layout Standard
2071 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2072 ing options for text.
2073 The special math option
2077 enables characters to be composed.
2078 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2079 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2082 , you can then input the characters
2083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2094 to a formula to get it.
2095 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2096 of the math toolbar.
2097 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2101 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2102 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2111 \begin_layout Section
2113 \begin_inset Index idx
2116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2123 \begin_inset Index idx
2126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset Index idx
2158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2203 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2205 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2209 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2216 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2223 \begin_layout Standard
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2235 \begin_inset space ~
2256 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2260 \begin_layout Labeling
2261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2265 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2266 LatexCommand nomenclature
2268 description "Tabulator key"
2274 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2275 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2276 \begin_inset space ~
2280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2282 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2289 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2293 , especially section
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2300 reference "sub:Lists"
2306 If you are still confused, look in the
2311 \begin_inset Newline newline
2318 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2319 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2323 \begin_layout Labeling
2324 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2328 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2329 LatexCommand nomenclature
2331 description "Escape key"
2338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2345 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2346 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2349 \begin_layout Labeling
2350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2356 \begin_inset space ~
2360 \begin_inset space ~
2367 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2368 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2372 \begin_layout Standard
2373 There are three modifier keys:
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2395 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2396 LatexCommand nomenclature
2398 description "Control key"
2402 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2403 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2407 \begin_layout Itemize
2416 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2419 \begin_layout Itemize
2428 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2431 \begin_layout Itemize
2440 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2444 \begin_layout Labeling
2445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2464 LatexCommand nomenclature
2466 description "Shift key"
2470 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2471 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2474 \begin_layout Labeling
2475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2493 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2494 LatexCommand nomenclature
2496 description "Alt or Meta key"
2500 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2501 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2502 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2508 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2513 menu accelerator keys
2516 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2517 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2521 \begin_layout Standard
2522 For example, the sequence
2523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2539 \begin_inset space ~
2547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2566 \begin_inset space ~
2572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2582 \begin_layout Standard
2587 manual lists all other things bound to the
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2596 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2597 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2598 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2599 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2600 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2601 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2602 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2604 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2620 followed by a capital
2627 \begin_layout Chapter
2629 \begin_inset Index idx
2632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2641 \begin_layout Section
2643 \begin_inset Index idx
2646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_layout Subsection
2659 \begin_layout Standard
2660 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2661 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2662 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2663 numbering schemes, and so on.
2664 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2665 and format the title of your document differently.
2668 \begin_layout Standard
2673 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2674 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2675 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2676 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2677 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2680 \begin_layout Subsection
2682 \begin_inset Index idx
2685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2694 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2701 \begin_layout Standard
2702 You can select a class using the
2704 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2705 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2709 \begin_inset Index idx
2712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2719 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2727 \begin_layout Standard
2728 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2732 \begin_layout Description
2733 Article for basic articles
2736 \begin_layout Description
2737 Report for basic reports
2740 \begin_layout Description
2741 Book for writing a book
2744 \begin_layout Description
2745 Letter for US-style letters
2748 \begin_layout Standard
2749 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2750 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2751 will include many of these.
2752 Here are some of the classes.
2753 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2755 Special Document Classes
2764 \begin_layout Description
2765 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2768 \begin_layout Description
2769 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2780 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2781 There are three article layouts available.
2782 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2783 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2784 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2785 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2790 sequential numbering
2791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2794 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2795 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2796 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2797 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2800 \begin_layout Description
2801 Beamer Layout for presentations
2804 \begin_layout Description
2805 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2806 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2810 \begin_layout Description
2811 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2814 \begin_layout Description
2816 \begin_inset space ~
2819 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2822 \begin_layout Description
2823 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2826 \begin_layout Description
2827 Foils Used to make transparencies
2830 \begin_layout Description
2831 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2832 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2836 \begin_layout Description
2837 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2838 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2845 \begin_layout Description
2846 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2851 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2852 (Is used by this document.)
2855 \begin_layout Description
2856 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2859 \begin_layout Description
2860 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2863 \begin_layout Description
2868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2875 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2876 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2878 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2881 \begin_layout Description
2882 Slides Used to make transparencies
2885 \begin_layout Description
2887 \begin_inset space ~
2890 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2891 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2894 \begin_layout Description
2895 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2898 \begin_layout Standard
2899 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2901 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2907 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2908 of the document classes.
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2918 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2919 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2921 \begin_inset Index idx
2924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2941 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2942 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2944 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2947 \begin_layout Standard
2949 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2950 and some of them, like
2954 , are highly specialized.
2955 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2956 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2958 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2959 by some document class.
2960 There are just too many of them.
2961 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2964 \begin_layout Standard
2965 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2973 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2974 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2975 document class for a new file.
2976 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2981 Installing new LaTeX files
2982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2989 manual for information on how to install them.
2990 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2996 \begin_layout Standard
2997 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2998 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3000 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3001 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3002 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3004 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3008 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3014 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3026 \begin_inset Index idx
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3038 \begin_layout Standard
3039 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3040 chosen document class.
3041 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3042 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3049 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3053 \begin_inset Index idx
3056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3067 \begin_layout Standard
3068 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3069 always installed by default.
3070 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3071 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3072 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3073 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3074 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3075 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3076 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3079 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3083 \begin_inset Index idx
3086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3087 Reconfiguration of LyX
3093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3096 Installing new LaTeX files
3097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3104 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3107 \begin_layout Standard
3108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3116 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3117 LyX will advise you about these things.
3125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3129 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3134 \begin_inset Index idx
3137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3138 Document ! Local Layout
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3148 used in a variety of different documents.
3149 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3150 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3151 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3152 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3153 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3154 What you want is LyX's
3155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3171 manual for information on how to use it.
3174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3178 \begin_layout Standard
3179 Each class has a default set of options.
3180 Here's a quick table describing them:
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3190 \begin_layout Standard
3192 \begin_inset Tabular
3193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3194 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3199 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3653 \begin_layout Standard
3654 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3660 \begin_layout Standard
3661 You're probably also wondering what
3662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3666 \begin_inset space ~
3670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3674 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3675 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3680 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3685 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3695 headings, there are also
3703 headings, and so on.
3704 We will describe these headings fully in section
3705 \begin_inset space ~
3709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3711 reference "sub:Headings"
3718 \begin_layout Subsection
3720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3722 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3727 \begin_inset Index idx
3730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 \begin_inset Index idx
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3751 \begin_layout Standard
3752 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3754 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3761 \begin_inset space ~
3769 \begin_inset space ~
3774 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3776 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3777 to use for your document.
3778 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3782 \begin_layout Standard
3786 \begin_inset space ~
3793 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3799 \begin_inset space ~
3804 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3805 You can choose between the following five options:
3808 \begin_layout Labeling
3809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3814 Use default page style of current class.
3817 \begin_layout Labeling
3818 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3823 No page numbers or headings.
3826 \begin_layout Labeling
3827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3835 \begin_layout Labeling
3836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3841 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3842 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3843 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3846 \begin_layout Labeling
3847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3852 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3853 have the LaTeX-package
3858 \begin_inset Index idx
3861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3862 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3868 How they are defined is explained in section
3869 \begin_inset space ~
3873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3875 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3882 \begin_layout Standard
3883 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3884 \begin_inset space ~
3888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3890 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3897 \begin_layout Subsection
3898 Paper Size and Orientation
3899 \begin_inset Index idx
3902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3903 Document ! Paper size
3909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3911 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3918 \begin_layout Standard
3919 You can find the following options in the menu
3922 \begin_inset space ~
3929 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Labeling
3948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3952 \begin_inset space ~
3957 What size paper to print on.
3962 \begin_layout Itemize
3968 \begin_layout Itemize
3974 \begin_layout Itemize
3980 \begin_layout Itemize
3986 \begin_layout Itemize
3989 US letter, US legal, US executive
3992 \begin_layout Itemize
3998 \begin_layout Itemize
4005 \begin_layout Labeling
4006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4011 To choose whether to output as
4022 \begin_layout Labeling
4023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 \begin_inset space ~
4032 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4033 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4036 \begin_layout Subsection
4038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4045 \begin_inset Index idx
4048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4055 \begin_inset Index idx
4058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 \begin_layout Standard
4068 Paper margins are set in the menu
4070 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4074 \begin_inset Index idx
4077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4086 \begin_layout Standard
4087 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4088 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4089 the paper format and the font size into account.
4092 \begin_layout Subsection
4096 \begin_layout Standard
4097 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4102 That includes the paragraph environments.
4103 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4104 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4105 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4106 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4115 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4117 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4118 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4119 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4122 \begin_layout Section
4123 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4124 \begin_inset Index idx
4127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4128 Paragraph ! Indentation
4136 \begin_layout Subsection
4138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4140 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4147 \begin_layout Standard
4148 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4149 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4152 \begin_layout Standard
4153 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4154 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4155 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4156 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4160 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4166 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4167 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4168 language than English.
4169 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4173 \begin_layout Standard
4174 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4175 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4177 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4178 LyX takes care of that.
4179 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4181 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4182 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4183 of a page, and so on.
4187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4188 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4193 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4194 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4198 these pre-coded spacings.
4199 We will explain more later.
4202 \begin_layout Subsection
4203 Paragraph Separation
4204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4206 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4211 \begin_inset Index idx
4214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4215 Paragraph ! Separation
4223 \begin_layout Standard
4231 \begin_inset space ~
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4250 \begin_inset Index idx
4253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4259 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4262 \begin_layout Subsection
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4270 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4272 \begin_inset space ~
4277 dialog and toggle the
4280 \begin_inset space ~
4285 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4288 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4292 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4293 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4297 \begin_layout Standard
4298 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4299 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4302 \begin_layout Subsection
4304 \begin_inset Index idx
4307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4308 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4316 \begin_layout Standard
4319 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4323 \begin_inset Index idx
4326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4335 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4339 \begin_inset space ~
4348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4349 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4354 \begin_inset Index idx
4357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4358 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4363 installed to use this feature.
4368 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4370 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4372 \begin_inset space ~
4377 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4378 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4381 \begin_layout Section
4382 Paragraph Environments
4383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4385 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4390 \begin_inset Index idx
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4394 Paragraph ! Environments
4400 \begin_inset Index idx
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 Paragraph environments|(
4412 \begin_layout Subsection
4416 \begin_layout Standard
4417 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4439 \begin_inset Newline newline
4442 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4443 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4444 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4453 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4456 \begin_layout Standard
4457 A paragraph environment is simply a
4458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4465 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4466 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4467 scheme, labels, and so on.
4468 Additionally, you can
4469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4476 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4477 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4478 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4479 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4481 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4483 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4488 \begin_inset Graphics
4489 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4495 at the left end of the toolbar.
4496 LyX will change the environment of the
4500 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4501 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4502 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4506 \begin_layout Standard
4515 create a new paragraph using the
4519 paragraph environment.
4521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4528 because if you are in one of these environments:
4531 \begin_layout Itemize
4537 \begin_layout Itemize
4543 \begin_layout Itemize
4549 \begin_layout Itemize
4555 \begin_layout Itemize
4561 \begin_layout Itemize
4567 \begin_layout Itemize
4573 \begin_layout Standard
4574 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4578 , rather than resetting it to
4583 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4584 \begin_inset space ~
4588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4590 reference "sec:Nesting"
4597 \begin_layout Subsection
4601 \begin_layout Standard
4602 The default paragraph environment is
4607 It creates a plain paragraph.
4608 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4609 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4610 this manual) are in the
4617 \begin_layout Standard
4618 You can nest a paragraph using the
4622 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4630 \begin_layout Subsection
4632 \begin_inset Index idx
4635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4645 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4654 for thanks or contact information.
4655 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4656 page along with today's date.
4657 For other types of documents, the title
4658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4665 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4669 \begin_layout Standard
4670 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4684 Here's how you use them:
4687 \begin_layout Itemize
4688 Put the title of your document in the
4695 \begin_layout Itemize
4696 Put the author name in the
4703 \begin_layout Itemize
4704 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4705 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4711 Note that using this environment is optional.
4712 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4713 If you don't want a date, use the option
4715 Suppress default date on front page
4719 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4720 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4722 \begin_inset space ~
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4731 You can use footnotes to insert
4732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4739 or contact information.
4742 \begin_layout Subsection
4744 \begin_inset Index idx
4747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4763 \begin_layout Standard
4764 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4765 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4770 \begin_inset Index idx
4773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4774 Section headings ! Numbered
4782 \begin_layout Standard
4783 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4787 \begin_layout Enumerate
4793 \begin_layout Enumerate
4799 \begin_layout Enumerate
4805 \begin_layout Enumerate
4811 \begin_layout Enumerate
4817 \begin_layout Enumerate
4823 \begin_layout Enumerate
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4831 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4832 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4837 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4838 You group the book into chapters.
4839 LyX does a similar grouping:
4842 \begin_layout Itemize
4847 is divided into either
4858 \begin_layout Itemize
4870 \begin_layout Itemize
4882 \begin_layout Itemize
4894 \begin_layout Itemize
4906 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4927 Not all document types use the
4931 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4936 is the top-level heading.
4944 \begin_layout Standard
4949 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4950 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4952 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4964 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4966 \begin_inset Index idx
4969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4970 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4978 \begin_layout Standard
4979 The unnumbered section headings have a
4980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4987 at the end of their name.
4988 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4989 the table of contents, see section
4990 \begin_inset space ~
4994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5003 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 Changing the Numbering
5005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5007 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5014 \begin_layout Standard
5015 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5016 in the Table of Contents.
5017 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5019 Just as certain classes start with
5033 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5043 This is something you can change.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5049 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5053 \begin_inset Index idx
5056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5065 \begin_inset space ~
5069 \begin_inset space ~
5074 you will see two counters.
5079 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5081 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5086 Short Titles of Headings
5087 \begin_inset Index idx
5090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5091 Section headings ! Short titles
5097 \begin_inset Argument 1
5100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5109 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5116 \begin_layout Standard
5117 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5118 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5119 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5120 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5123 \begin_layout Standard
5124 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5125 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5126 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5127 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5130 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5132 \begin_inset space ~
5138 This will insert a box labeled
5139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5143 \begin_inset space ~
5147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5150 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5151 This also works for captions inside floats.
5152 There can only be one short title per title.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5163 \begin_layout Standard
5164 The following information applies to all section headings:
5167 \begin_layout Itemize
5168 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5171 \begin_layout Itemize
5172 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5175 \begin_layout Itemize
5176 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5179 \begin_layout Itemize
5180 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5183 \begin_layout Subsection
5184 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
5187 \begin_layout Standard
5188 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5202 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5203 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5204 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5205 the text they contain.
5206 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5214 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5218 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5227 when you start a new paragraph.
5228 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5232 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5233 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5234 have to change back to the
5238 environment yourself.
5241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5258 \begin_inset Index idx
5261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5270 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5272 time for the differences.
5281 are identical except for one difference:
5285 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5294 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5297 \begin_layout Standard
5298 Here's an example of the
5311 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5313 See – no indentation!
5317 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5318 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5319 the other paragraph.
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5323 Here's another example, this time in the
5330 \begin_layout Quotation
5336 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5337 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5338 the first line, then
5342 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5346 you were quoting other text.
5349 \begin_layout Quotation
5350 Here's a new paragraph.
5351 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5352 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5355 \begin_layout Standard
5356 As the examples show,
5360 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5361 They should put quotes in the
5366 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5370 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5379 \begin_inset Index idx
5382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5391 \begin_inset Index idx
5394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5415 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5421 \begin_inset Newline newline
5424 Which I did not rehearse!
5428 It could be much worse.
5429 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5431 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5432 indented a bit more than the first.
5433 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5439 \begin_inset Newline newline
5442 And make things look fine
5443 \begin_inset Newline newline
5449 arg "newline-insert newline"
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5460 does not indent both margins.
5461 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5462 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5469 arg "newline-insert newline"
5475 \begin_layout Subsection
5477 \begin_inset Index idx
5480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 \begin_layout Standard
5497 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5507 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5516 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5517 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5518 describing some general features of all four of them.
5521 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5525 \begin_layout Standard
5526 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5528 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5537 reset the environment to
5541 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5542 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5543 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5547 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5551 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5558 \begin_layout Standard
5559 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5560 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5562 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5563 you read all of section
5564 \begin_inset space ~
5568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5570 reference "sec:Nesting"
5577 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5583 \begin_inset Index idx
5586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5602 \begin_layout Standard
5603 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5607 paragraph environment.
5608 It has the following properties:
5611 \begin_layout Itemize
5612 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5616 \begin_layout Itemize
5617 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5620 \begin_layout Itemize
5621 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5625 \begin_layout Itemize
5626 The items can have any length.
5627 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5628 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5640 environment inside another
5644 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5648 \begin_layout Itemize
5649 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5652 \begin_layout Itemize
5653 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5656 \begin_layout Itemize
5658 \begin_inset space ~
5662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5664 reference "sec:Nesting"
5668 for a full explanation of nesting.
5672 \begin_layout Standard
5673 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5682 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5685 \begin_layout Standard
5686 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5687 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5691 The label for the first level
5695 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5699 \begin_layout Itemize
5700 The label for the second level is a dash.
5704 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5709 \begin_layout Itemize
5710 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5714 \begin_layout Itemize
5715 Back out to the third level.
5719 \begin_layout Itemize
5720 Back to the second level.
5724 \begin_layout Itemize
5725 Back to the outermost level.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 These are the default labels for an
5734 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5736 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5739 dialog in the submenu
5744 \begin_inset Index idx
5747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5758 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5760 \begin_inset space ~
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5766 reference "sec:Nesting"
5773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5779 \begin_inset Index idx
5782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5791 name "sec:Enumerate"
5798 \begin_layout Standard
5803 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5804 It has these properties:
5807 \begin_layout Enumerate
5808 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5812 \begin_layout Enumerate
5813 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5821 \begin_layout Enumerate
5826 environment resets the counter to one.
5829 \begin_layout Enumerate
5842 \begin_layout Enumerate
5843 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5844 Items can have any length.
5847 \begin_layout Enumerate
5848 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5851 \begin_layout Enumerate
5852 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5855 \begin_layout Enumerate
5856 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5860 \begin_layout Standard
5869 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5870 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5877 \begin_layout Enumerate
5878 The first level of an
5882 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5900 \begin_layout Enumerate
5901 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5906 \begin_layout Enumerate
5907 Back to the third level
5911 \begin_layout Enumerate
5912 Back to the second level.
5916 \begin_layout Enumerate
5917 Back to the outermost level.
5920 \begin_layout Standard
5921 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5925 environment, see section
5926 \begin_inset space ~
5930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5932 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5937 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5940 \begin_layout Standard
5941 There is more to nesting
5945 environments than we've stated here.
5946 You should read section
5947 \begin_inset space ~
5951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5953 reference "sec:Nesting"
5957 to learn more about nesting.
5960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5966 \begin_inset Index idx
5969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_layout Standard
5979 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5983 list has no fixed label.
5984 Instead, LyX uses the first
5985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5992 of the first line as the label.
5996 \begin_layout Description
5997 Example: This is an example of the
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6005 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6009 \begin_layout Standard
6011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6018 it is meant that the first usage of the
6022 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6024 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6032 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
6037 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6038 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6040 \begin_inset space ~
6046 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6052 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6056 for more information.) Here is an example:
6059 \begin_layout Description
6061 \begin_inset space ~
6064 Example: This one shows how to use a
6067 \begin_inset space ~
6079 \begin_layout Description
6080 Usage: You should use the
6084 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6085 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6087 It's not a good idea to use a
6091 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6092 You're better off using
6104 paragraphs into them.
6107 \begin_layout Description
6108 Nesting: You can nest
6112 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6116 \begin_layout Standard
6117 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6118 them from the first line.
6121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6123 \begin_inset Index idx
6126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6140 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6152 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6154 Here are its properties:
6157 \begin_layout Labeling
6158 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6160 \begin_inset space ~
6163 labels LyX uses the first
6164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6171 of each line as the item label.
6176 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6177 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6178 space as described above.
6181 \begin_layout Labeling
6182 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6183 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6184 the body of the item text.
6185 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6186 label width plus a little extra space.
6190 \begin_layout Labeling
6191 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6193 \begin_inset space ~
6196 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6198 If the label width is larger, the label
6199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6206 into the first line.
6207 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6208 margin of the rest of the item text.
6211 \begin_layout Labeling
6212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6214 \begin_inset space ~
6217 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6222 environment has the same left margin.
6223 \begin_inset Newline newline
6226 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6229 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6231 \begin_inset space ~
6236 dialog (toolbar button
6239 arg "layout-paragraph"
6246 \begin_inset space ~
6251 determines the default label width.
6252 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6261 multiple times instead.
6262 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6271 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6279 every time you alter a label in a
6284 \begin_inset Newline newline
6287 The predefined default width is the length of
6288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6296 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Standard
6307 list the same way as the
6311 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6317 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6321 \begin_layout Standard
6326 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6327 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6329 \begin_inset space ~
6333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6335 reference "sec:Nesting"
6339 to learn about nesting.
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 There is yet another feature of the
6347 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6349 You can use additional
6353 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6358 are documented in section
6359 \begin_inset space ~
6363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6365 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6370 Here are some examples:
6373 \begin_layout Labeling
6374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6375 Left The default for
6382 \begin_layout Labeling
6383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6384 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6391 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6400 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6407 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6410 \begin_layout Subsection
6412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6414 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6419 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 \begin_layout Standard
6432 The features described in this section require that the module
6434 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6436 is loaded in the document settings.
6437 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6442 \begin_inset Index idx
6445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6446 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6455 Custom Enumerate Lists
6456 \begin_inset Index idx
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6460 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6468 \begin_layout Standard
6470 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6473 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6476 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6477 There you add the command
6480 \begin_layout Standard
6488 \begin_layout Standard
6489 in TeX Code (shortcut
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6500 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6501 \begin_inset space ~
6505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6507 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6520 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6527 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6528 For capital Roman numerals replace
6540 in the command above.
6541 For Arabic numerals use
6549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6556 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 You can only number 26
6582 \begin_inset space ~
6585 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6593 \begin_layout Standard
6594 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6595 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6598 \begin_layout Standard
6599 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6602 \begin_layout Enumerate
6603 \begin_inset Argument 1
6606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 \begin_layout Enumerate
6633 \begin_inset Argument 1
6636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6659 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_layout Enumerate
6665 \begin_inset Argument 1
6668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 \begin_layout Enumerate
6693 \begin_inset Argument 1
6696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6723 For this list these commands were used:
6726 \begin_layout Standard
6737 \begin_inset Newline newline
6745 \begin_inset Newline newline
6753 \begin_inset Newline newline
6763 \begin_layout Standard
6770 makes the label emphasized and
6779 \begin_layout Standard
6780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6788 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6789 lists until you change the definition.
6797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6799 \begin_inset Index idx
6802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6803 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6811 \begin_layout Standard
6812 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6815 \begin_layout Enumerate
6816 \begin_inset Argument 1
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_inset Note Note
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 goes back to default numbering
6850 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6858 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6868 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6869 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6872 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6881 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6889 \begin_layout Standard
6890 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6892 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6893 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6894 of a normal enumeration.
6895 There, insert the command
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6909 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6917 \begin_layout Enumerate
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6922 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate
6926 \begin_inset Argument 1
6929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6945 This enumeration starts at 4
6948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6950 \begin_inset Index idx
6953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6963 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6965 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6968 \begin_layout Itemize
6972 \begin_layout Itemize
6973 with standard spacing
6976 \begin_layout Standard
6977 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6979 Add there the command
6983 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6986 \begin_layout Itemize
6987 \begin_inset Argument 1
6990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 \begin_layout Itemize
7013 \begin_layout Itemize
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7024 \begin_inset Index idx
7027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7028 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7034 For more information see its documentation,
7035 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7045 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7047 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7048 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7052 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7055 \begin_layout Enumerate
7056 \begin_inset Argument 1
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7067 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7080 \begin_layout Enumerate
7081 with negative indentation
7084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7085 Further Customization
7086 \begin_inset Index idx
7089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7090 Lists ! Customization
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 You can also change the style of description lists.
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 changes the description label font, the command
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7120 sets the list style.
7123 \begin_layout Standard
7124 An example where the command
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7132 itshape, style=nextline
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7139 \begin_layout Description
7141 \begin_inset space ~
7145 \begin_inset Argument 1
7148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7154 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7156 itshape, style=nextline
7166 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7167 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7171 \begin_layout Description
7173 \begin_inset space ~
7176 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7177 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7178 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7192 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7198 For more information see its documentation
7199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7208 \begin_layout Subsection
7210 \begin_inset Index idx
7213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7230 \begin_inset space ~
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7239 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7247 \begin_inset space ~
7253 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7254 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7255 In contrast, you can use the
7262 \begin_inset space ~
7267 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7268 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7273 Of course, you're not limited to using
7280 \begin_inset space ~
7289 \begin_inset space ~
7294 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7295 some European academic papers.
7298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7302 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7309 \begin_layout Standard
7314 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7315 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7319 \begin_inset space ~
7324 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7325 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7326 Here's an example of each:
7329 \begin_layout Right Address
7331 \begin_inset Newline newline
7335 \begin_inset Newline newline
7339 \begin_inset Newline newline
7342 When is it? What is today?
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7349 \begin_inset space ~
7355 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7356 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7357 Here's an example of the
7364 \begin_layout Address
7366 \begin_inset Newline newline
7369 Where do I send this
7370 \begin_inset Newline newline
7373 Your post office and country
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7377 As you can see, both
7384 \begin_inset space ~
7389 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7394 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7400 This makes sense, since
7408 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7409 Thus, you have to use
7416 arg "newline-insert newline"
7421 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7422 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7424 \begin_inset space ~
7428 \begin_inset space ~
7433 ) to start a new line in an
7440 \begin_inset space ~
7448 \begin_layout Subsection
7452 \begin_layout Standard
7453 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7454 or list of references.
7455 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7462 \begin_inset Index idx
7465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7479 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7480 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7481 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7482 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7496 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7497 The book document classes ignores the
7501 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7505 in a letter document class.
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7513 environment does several things for you.
7514 First, it puts the centered label
7515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7523 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7525 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7526 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7527 the subsequent text.
7528 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7529 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7533 \begin_layout Standard
7534 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7538 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7539 The new paragraph will still be in the
7544 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7545 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7548 \begin_layout Standard
7549 \begin_inset Float figure
7554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7556 \begin_inset Graphics
7557 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7565 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7570 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7591 \begin_layout Standard
7592 We would love to demonstrate the
7596 environment, but since this document is in the
7597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7604 class, we can't do this.
7605 We inserted it therefore as figure
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7612 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7617 If you have never heard of an
7618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7625 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7634 \begin_inset Index idx
7637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7646 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7653 \begin_layout Standard
7658 environment is used to list references.
7659 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7660 only use it at the end of the document.
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7673 When you first open a
7677 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7693 depending on the document class.
7694 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7695 Each paragraph of the
7699 environment is a bibliography entry.
7704 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7705 Each new paragraph is still in the
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7713 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7714 by using a BibTeX database.
7715 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7716 phy handling, have a look at section
7717 \begin_inset space ~
7721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7723 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7730 \begin_layout Subsection
7734 \begin_inset Index idx
7737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7738 Paragraph ! LyX code
7744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7758 environment is another LyX extension.
7759 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7764 key as a fixed whitespace;
7768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7780 \begin_inset space ~
7785 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7790 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7791 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7794 arg "newline-insert newline"
7811 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7812 So, when you finish using the
7816 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7817 Also, you can nest the
7821 environment inside of others.
7824 \begin_layout Standard
7825 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7828 \begin_layout Itemize
7832 arg "newline-insert newline"
7835 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7840 \begin_inset space \space{}
7850 arg "newline-insert newline"
7856 \begin_layout Itemize
7860 arg "newline-insert newline"
7871 \begin_layout Itemize
7876 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7883 \begin_layout Itemize
7887 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7894 \begin_layout Itemize
7895 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7896 You must put at least one
7900 in any line you want blank.
7901 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7904 \begin_layout Itemize
7905 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7909 since that will insert
7914 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7917 arg "self-insert \""
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7927 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7931 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7935 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7939 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7943 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7944 printf("Hello World!
7949 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7953 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7957 \begin_layout Standard
7958 This is just the standard
7959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7970 \begin_layout Standard
7975 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7976 rc-files, and so on.
7977 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7978 as if you used a typewriter.
7979 \begin_inset Index idx
7982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7983 Paragraph environments|)
7988 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7991 Program Code Listings
7996 \begin_inset space ~
8004 \begin_layout Section
8005 Nesting Environments
8006 \begin_inset Index idx
8009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8010 Nesting ! Environments
8016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8025 \begin_layout Subsection
8029 \begin_layout Standard
8030 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8032 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8034 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8036 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8048 \begin_layout Enumerate
8052 \begin_layout Enumerate
8057 \begin_layout Enumerate
8061 \begin_layout Enumerate
8066 \begin_layout Enumerate
8070 \begin_layout Standard
8071 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8072 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8074 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8076 \begin_inset space ~
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8088 \begin_inset space ~
8092 \begin_inset space ~
8097 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8099 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8102 arg "depth-increment"
8108 arg "depth-decrement"
8122 arg "depth-increment"
8128 arg "depth-decrement"
8132 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8133 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8137 \begin_layout Standard
8138 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8139 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8140 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8141 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8144 \begin_layout Standard
8145 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8146 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8148 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8151 \begin_layout Subsection
8152 What You Can and Can't Nest
8155 \begin_layout Standard
8156 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8157 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8161 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8162 than a simple yes or no.
8163 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8166 \begin_layout Itemize
8167 Completely unnestable
8170 \begin_layout Itemize
8171 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8175 \begin_layout Itemize
8176 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8180 \begin_layout Standard
8181 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8182 environments have them:
8185 \begin_layout Description
8186 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8187 Can't nest into them.
8191 \begin_layout Itemize
8197 \begin_layout Itemize
8203 \begin_layout Itemize
8209 \begin_layout Itemize
8215 \begin_layout Itemize
8222 \begin_layout Description
8224 \begin_inset space ~
8227 Nestable You can nest them.
8228 You can nest other things into them.
8232 \begin_layout Itemize
8238 \begin_layout Itemize
8244 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 \begin_layout Itemize
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8281 \begin_layout Description
8282 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8283 You can't nest anything into them.
8287 \begin_layout Itemize
8293 \begin_layout Itemize
8299 \begin_layout Itemize
8305 \begin_layout Itemize
8311 \begin_layout Itemize
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8335 \begin_layout Itemize
8341 \begin_layout Itemize
8347 \begin_layout Itemize
8353 \begin_layout Itemize
8359 \begin_layout Itemize
8365 \begin_layout Itemize
8369 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Standard
8383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8391 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8401 \begin_inset space ~
8404 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8405 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8406 nested section headings violate this.
8414 \begin_layout Subsection
8415 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8416 \begin_inset Index idx
8419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8420 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8429 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8430 affected by nesting anyhow.
8434 \begin_layout Itemize
8438 \begin_layout Itemize
8442 \begin_layout Itemize
8446 \begin_layout Standard
8448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8456 Figures and tables in
8460 are not affected by this.
8465 Have a look at section
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8472 reference "sec:Floats"
8476 for more information about
8483 \begin_layout Standard
8484 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8485 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8489 \begin_layout Standard
8490 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8498 of its own, it behaves just like a
8499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8506 paragraph environment.
8507 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 Here's an example with a table:
8515 \begin_layout Enumerate
8520 \begin_layout Enumerate
8521 This is (a) and it's nested.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8532 \begin_layout Standard
8534 \begin_inset Tabular
8535 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8536 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8537 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8538 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8622 \begin_layout Standard
8623 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8630 \begin_layout Enumerate
8632 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8636 \begin_layout Enumerate
8640 \begin_layout Standard
8641 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8644 \begin_layout Enumerate
8649 \begin_layout Enumerate
8650 This is (a) and it's nested.
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8661 \begin_layout Standard
8663 \begin_inset Tabular
8664 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8665 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8667 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8751 \begin_layout Standard
8752 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8758 \begin_layout Enumerate
8765 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8768 \begin_layout Enumerate
8772 \begin_layout Standard
8773 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8780 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8783 \begin_layout Enumerate
8788 \begin_layout Enumerate
8789 This is (a) and it's nested.
8792 \begin_layout Standard
8793 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8799 \begin_layout Standard
8801 \begin_inset Tabular
8802 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8803 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8897 \begin_layout Enumerate
8899 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8906 \begin_layout Enumerate
8910 \begin_layout Standard
8911 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8917 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8918 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8922 \begin_layout Subsection
8923 Usage and General Features
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8936 is the innermost possible depth.
8937 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8940 \begin_layout Enumerate
8941 level #1 – outermost
8945 \begin_layout Enumerate
8950 \begin_layout Enumerate
8955 \begin_layout Enumerate
8960 \begin_layout Itemize
8965 \begin_layout Itemize
8974 \begin_layout Standard
8975 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8976 both of them in the example.
8977 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8987 For example, if we tried to nest another
8992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8999 , we would get errors.
9002 \begin_layout Subsection
9004 \begin_inset Index idx
9007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9016 \begin_layout Standard
9017 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9018 We have several examples of nested environments.
9019 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9024 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9027 \begin_layout Labeling
9028 \labelwidthstring MMM
9029 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9038 \begin_layout Labeling
9039 \labelwidthstring MMM
9040 #2-a This is level #2.
9041 We created it by using
9044 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9050 arg "depth-increment"
9057 \begin_layout Labeling
9058 \labelwidthstring MMM
9059 #3-a This is level #3.
9060 This time, we just enter
9067 arg "depth-increment"
9071 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9075 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9081 arg "depth-increment"
9088 \begin_layout Standard
9093 environment, nested inside of
9094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9102 So, it's at level #4.
9103 We did this by entering
9106 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9112 arg "depth-increment"
9115 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9120 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9136 \begin_layout Standard
9141 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9144 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9150 \begin_layout Labeling
9151 \labelwidthstring MMM
9152 #4-a This is level #4.
9156 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9159 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9164 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9168 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9173 keep nesting things inside
9174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9185 \begin_layout Labeling
9186 \labelwidthstring MMM
9187 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9192 \begin_layout Labeling
9193 \labelwidthstring MMM
9194 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9195 and this is level #6.
9196 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9200 \begin_layout Labeling
9201 \labelwidthstring MMM
9202 #5-b Back to level #5.
9206 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9212 arg "depth-decrement"
9219 \begin_layout Labeling
9220 \labelwidthstring MMM
9224 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9230 arg "depth-decrement"
9233 , we're back at level #4.
9237 \begin_layout Labeling
9238 \labelwidthstring MMM
9239 #3-b Back to level #3.
9240 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9244 \begin_layout Labeling
9245 \labelwidthstring MMM
9246 #2-b Back to level #2.
9251 \begin_layout Labeling
9252 \labelwidthstring MMM
9253 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9254 After this sentence, we will enter
9258 and change the paragraph environment back to
9265 \begin_layout Standard
9266 We could have also used the
9282 environment in place of the
9287 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9291 Example 2: Inheritance
9294 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9295 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9298 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9307 arg "depth-increment"
9311 \begin_inset Newline newline
9314 which, we will change to the
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9327 environment, at level #2.
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 Notice how the nested
9335 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9339 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9343 \begin_layout Standard
9344 We ended this example by entering
9349 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9353 and reset the nesting depth by using
9356 arg "depth-decrement"
9362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9363 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9372 \begin_inset Argument 1
9375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9376 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9384 \begin_layout Enumerate
9385 This is level #1, in an
9389 paragraph environment.
9390 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9394 \begin_layout Enumerate
9399 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9405 arg "depth-increment"
9409 Now, what happens if we nest an
9413 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9414 label be? An asterisk?
9418 \begin_layout Itemize
9428 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9429 So, its label is a bullet.
9430 (We got here by using
9433 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9439 arg "depth-increment"
9442 , then changing the environment to
9450 \begin_layout Itemize
9451 Here's level #4, produced using
9454 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9460 arg "depth-increment"
9464 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9469 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9472 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9477 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9481 , because we are in the
9489 environment (that is, it is an
9504 \begin_layout Enumerate
9509 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9510 type of numbering does LyX use?
9513 \begin_layout Enumerate
9514 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9517 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9520 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9523 \begin_layout Enumerate
9527 arg "depth-decrement"
9530 to decrease the depth after the next
9533 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9540 \begin_layout Enumerate
9542 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9546 \begin_layout Enumerate
9548 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9549 numeral as the label.Why?
9552 \begin_layout Enumerate
9553 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9562 Notice, however, that LyX
9566 reset the counter for the label.
9570 \begin_layout Enumerate
9574 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9580 arg "depth-decrement"
9583 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9584 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9585 into the twofold-nested
9593 \begin_layout Enumerate
9594 The same thing happens if we do another
9597 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9603 arg "depth-decrement"
9606 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9609 \begin_layout Standard
9610 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9615 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9629 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9635 The same rule applies for the
9639 environment, as well.
9642 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9643 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9646 \begin_layout Enumerate
9647 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9648 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9649 the same detail with how we did it.
9658 \begin_layout Standard
9666 arg "depth-increment"
9673 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9674 the example in parentheses someplace.
9675 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9676 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9677 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9681 \begin_layout Enumerate
9686 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9691 Now we will add verse.
9692 \begin_inset Newline newline
9695 It will get much worse.
9696 \begin_inset Newline newline
9706 arg "depth-increment"
9717 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9718 \begin_inset Newline newline
9721 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9722 \begin_inset Newline newline
9728 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9748 \begin_layout Standard
9750 \begin_inset Tabular
9751 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9752 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9753 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9754 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9843 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9853 arg "depth-increment"
9859 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9869 arg "depth-decrement"
9876 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 : level #1) This is another item.
9882 Note that selecting a
9886 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9887 3 times to put the table inside the
9895 \begin_layout Quotation
9896 We're now ending the
9900 list and changing to
9905 We're still at level #1.
9906 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9907 The next set of paragraphs is a
9908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9915 We will nest both the
9922 \begin_inset space ~
9927 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9931 for the letter body.
9935 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9938 to preserve the depth.
9939 Remember that you need to use
9942 arg "newline-insert newline"
9945 to create multiple lines inside the
9952 \begin_inset space ~
9962 \begin_layout Right Address
9964 \begin_inset Newline newline
9967 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9968 \begin_inset Newline newline
9974 \begin_layout Address
9976 \begin_inset space ~
9982 \begin_layout Quotation
9983 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9987 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9988 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9989 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9990 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9991 as soon as possible.
9992 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9995 \begin_layout Quotation
9996 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9997 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9998 with your order, along with payment.
10001 \begin_layout Quotation
10002 We thank you again for your patience.
10005 \begin_layout Address
10007 \begin_inset Newline newline
10014 \begin_layout Quotation
10015 That ends that example!
10018 \begin_layout Standard
10019 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10020 just a few keystrokes.
10021 We could have easily nested an
10042 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10045 \begin_layout Section
10046 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10047 \begin_inset Index idx
10050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10059 \begin_layout Standard
10060 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10061 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10062 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10063 be broken at the end of a line.
10064 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10068 \begin_layout Subsection
10070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10072 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10077 \begin_inset Index idx
10080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10089 \begin_layout Standard
10090 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10091 line at that point.
10092 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10095 \begin_layout Quote
10096 Further documentation is given in section
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10103 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10111 \begin_layout Standard
10112 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10127 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10136 A protected space is set with
10138 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10139 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10141 \begin_inset space ~
10149 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
10155 \begin_layout Subsection
10157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10159 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10164 \begin_inset Index idx
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10168 Spacing ! Horizontal
10176 \begin_layout Standard
10177 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10179 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10180 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10184 The length units are listed in Appendix
10185 \begin_inset space ~
10189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10191 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10202 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10207 \begin_inset Index idx
10210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10211 Spaces ! Inter-word
10219 \begin_layout Standard
10220 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10221 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10222 at the ends of sentences.
10223 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10224 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10225 followed by a period; see section
10226 \begin_inset space ~
10230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10232 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10237 To insert a normal space, select
10239 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10240 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10242 \begin_inset space ~
10250 arg "space-insert normal"
10256 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10260 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10265 \begin_inset Index idx
10268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10277 \begin_layout Standard
10279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10286 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10295 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10296 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10297 inside abbreviations:
10300 \begin_layout Quote
10302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10306 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10309 \begin_layout Standard
10310 or between values and units.
10311 Compare for example this:
10312 \begin_inset Newline newline
10316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10320 \begin_inset Newline newline
10323 10 kg (normal space
10326 \begin_layout Standard
10327 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10329 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10330 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10332 \begin_inset space ~
10340 arg "space-insert thin"
10346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10350 \begin_layout Standard
10351 You can also insert the following space types:
10354 \begin_layout Description
10356 \begin_inset space ~
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10363 space A line with a
10364 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10368 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10372 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10375 negative thin space between the arrows.
10378 \begin_layout Description
10380 \begin_inset space ~
10384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10388 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10392 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10396 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10400 \begin_inset space ~
10404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10407 em) space between the arrows.
10410 \begin_layout Description
10412 \begin_inset space ~
10416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10420 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10424 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10428 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10432 \begin_inset space ~
10436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10439 em) space between the arrows.
10442 \begin_layout Description
10444 \begin_inset space ~
10448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10452 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10456 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10460 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10464 \begin_inset space ~
10468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10471 em) space between the arrows.
10474 \begin_layout Description
10476 \begin_inset space ~
10480 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10484 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10489 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10493 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10496 cm space between the arrows.
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset space ~
10505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10507 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10511 lists the different space sizes.
10514 \begin_layout Standard
10515 \begin_inset Float table
10520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10522 \begin_inset Caption
10524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10527 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10531 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10541 \begin_inset Tabular
10542 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10543 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10544 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10545 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10768 \begin_inset Index idx
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10780 \begin_layout Standard
10781 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10782 in a uniform fashion.
10783 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10784 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10785 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10786 equally between themselves.
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10790 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10793 \begin_layout Quote
10795 This is on the left side
10796 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10799 This is on the right
10802 \begin_layout Quote
10805 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10809 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10815 \begin_layout Quote
10818 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10822 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10826 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10832 \begin_layout Standard
10833 That was an example in the
10839 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10843 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10847 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10850 is one in a standard paragraph.
10851 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10855 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10858 \begin_layout Standard
10859 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10867 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10870 \begin_layout Standard
10872 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10876 \begin_inset space ~
10882 \begin_layout Standard
10884 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10894 \begin_layout Standard
10896 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10900 \begin_inset space ~
10906 \begin_layout Standard
10908 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10918 \begin_layout Standard
10920 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10924 \begin_inset space ~
10930 \begin_layout Standard
10932 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10942 \begin_layout Standard
10943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10951 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10955 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10956 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10957 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10961 option in the space dialog.
10969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10973 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10978 \begin_inset Index idx
10981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10990 \begin_layout Standard
10991 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10992 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10995 \begin_layout Standard
10996 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10999 What is correct English?:
11000 \begin_inset Newline newline
11004 \begin_inset Newline newline
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11011 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11012 \begin_inset Newline newline
11016 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11027 \begin_inset Newline newline
11031 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11042 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11048 \begin_layout Standard
11050 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset space ~
11063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11067 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11069 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11070 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11074 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset space ~
11088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11091 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11100 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11101 That is why it is named
11102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11110 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11111 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11115 \begin_layout Subsection
11117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11119 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11124 \begin_inset Index idx
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 \begin_layout Standard
11137 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11139 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11140 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11142 \begin_inset space ~
11148 There you find the following sizes:
11151 \begin_layout Standard
11164 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11169 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11171 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11172 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11174 \begin_inset space ~
11180 \begin_inset Index idx
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11184 Document ! Settings
11189 for the paragraph separation.
11190 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11201 \begin_layout Standard
11207 \begin_inset Index idx
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11216 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11217 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11222 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11223 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11232 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 s are described in section
11242 \begin_inset space ~
11246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11248 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11257 If there are several
11261 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11262 You can therefore use
11266 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11269 \begin_layout Standard
11274 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11275 \begin_inset space ~
11279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11281 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11288 \begin_layout Standard
11289 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11300 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11312 \begin_layout Subsection
11313 Paragraph Alignment
11314 \begin_inset Index idx
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 Paragraph ! Alignment
11326 \begin_layout Standard
11327 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11329 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11332 dialog (toolbar button
11335 arg "layout-paragraph"
11339 There are five possibilities:
11342 \begin_layout Itemize
11350 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11356 \begin_layout Itemize
11364 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11370 \begin_layout Itemize
11378 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11384 \begin_layout Itemize
11392 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11398 \begin_layout Itemize
11406 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11412 \begin_layout Standard
11413 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11414 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11415 the left and right margins.
11416 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11421 This paragraph is right aligned,
11424 \begin_layout Standard
11426 this one is centered,
11429 \begin_layout Standard
11431 this one is left aligned.
11434 \begin_layout Subsection
11436 \begin_inset Index idx
11439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 Page breaks ! Forced
11446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11448 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11455 \begin_layout Standard
11456 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11457 can force a page break where you want one.
11458 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11459 Only if you use a lot of
11463 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11466 \begin_layout Standard
11467 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11468 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11472 have to change the page breaking.
11475 \begin_layout Standard
11476 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11478 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11480 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11481 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11483 \begin_inset space ~
11489 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11491 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11492 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11499 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11501 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11502 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11505 \begin_layout Standard
11506 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11507 at the top of a page.
11508 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11509 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11510 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11511 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11515 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11519 to learn more about
11526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11530 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11535 \begin_inset Index idx
11538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11539 Page breaks ! Clear
11547 \begin_layout Standard
11548 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11549 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11550 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11551 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11552 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11556 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11558 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11559 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11561 \begin_inset space ~
11567 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11569 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11570 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11572 \begin_inset space ~
11576 \begin_inset space ~
11581 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11582 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11585 \begin_layout Subsection
11587 \begin_inset Index idx
11590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11599 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11607 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11609 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11611 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11612 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11614 \begin_inset space ~
11618 \begin_inset space ~
11626 arg "newline-insert newline"
11630 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11632 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11633 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11635 \begin_inset space ~
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11647 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11650 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11652 This is useful to avoid
11653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11660 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11663 \begin_layout Standard
11664 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11665 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11666 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11667 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11674 reference "sec:Quote"
11679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11681 reference "sec:Verse"
11686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11688 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11695 \begin_layout Subsection
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11699 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11704 \begin_inset Index idx
11707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11718 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11729 \begin_layout Standard
11733 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11734 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11736 \begin_inset space ~
11741 you can insert horizontal lines.
11742 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11743 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11744 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11747 \begin_layout Standard
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11760 \begin_layout Section
11761 Characters and Symbols
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11766 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11767 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11775 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11779 for information on how this is done.
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11783 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11788 dialog via the menu
11790 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11791 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11797 \begin_layout Standard
11798 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11806 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11807 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11808 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11816 \begin_layout Section
11817 Fonts and Text Styles
11818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11820 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11827 \begin_layout Subsection
11829 \begin_inset Index idx
11832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11842 There are two types of fonts:
11845 \begin_layout Description
11847 \begin_inset space ~
11851 \begin_inset Index idx
11854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11860 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11865 characters) in the font.
11866 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11867 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11868 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11869 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11870 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11871 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11872 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11873 \begin_inset Newline newline
11876 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11877 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11878 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11879 sizes than at small ones.
11880 \begin_inset Newline newline
11894 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_layout Description
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset Index idx
11911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11917 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11918 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11919 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11920 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11921 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11922 image manipulation program.
11923 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11924 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11925 \begin_inset space ~
11928 pixels high up to 34
11929 \begin_inset space ~
11932 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11933 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11934 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11936 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11937 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11938 \begin_inset Newline newline
11941 Bitmap fonts are named
11944 \begin_inset space ~
11949 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11952 \begin_layout Standard
11953 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11954 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11955 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11956 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11957 use scalable fonts.
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11964 \begin_layout Standard
11965 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11966 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11967 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11968 font to emphasize text, you use an
11969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11977 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11978 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11982 \begin_layout Subsection
11984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11986 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11993 \begin_layout Standard
11994 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11995 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11996 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11998 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11999 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12000 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12001 to a word processor.
12002 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12003 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12004 across different machines.
12005 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12006 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12008 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
12010 \begin_inset space ~
12014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12016 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12021 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
12022 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
12026 \begin_layout Standard
12027 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12028 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12030 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12031 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12032 that is installed on your system.
12033 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12036 \begin_layout Standard
12037 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12045 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12046 es; so you might have to experiment.
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12063 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12064 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12072 \begin_layout Subsection
12073 Document Font and Font size
12074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12076 name "sub:Document-Font"
12081 \begin_inset Index idx
12084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12091 \begin_inset Index idx
12094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 You can set the document fonts in the
12106 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12110 \begin_inset Index idx
12113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12114 Document ! Settings
12124 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12125 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12128 \begin_inset space ~
12137 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12138 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
12139 with the roman font.
12142 \begin_layout Standard
12149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12159 This requires that you use
12165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12204 as the output format, i.
12205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12209 \begin_inset space \space{}
12212 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12219 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12224 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12225 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12227 \begin_inset space ~
12230 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12231 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12232 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12234 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12237 \begin_layout Standard
12238 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12243 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12248 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12249 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12275 European Computer Modern
12278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12285 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12288 \begin_layout Standard
12297 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12298 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12303 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12306 \begin_inset space ~
12311 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12317 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12318 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12321 \begin_layout Itemize
12325 \begin_inset space ~
12330 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12343 \begin_inset space ~
12348 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12352 as the default font.
12353 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12354 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12357 \begin_inset space ~
12370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12371 One difference is improved kerning.
12379 \begin_layout Itemize
12383 \begin_inset space ~
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12392 fonts in (the rare) case that
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12400 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12415 Virtual means that it
12416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12427 -glyphs from other fonts.
12428 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12450 Loading the LaTeX-package
12455 \begin_inset Index idx
12458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12459 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12464 with the document preamble line
12465 \begin_inset Newline newline
12472 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12473 \begin_inset Newline newline
12478 will fix the guillemet problem.
12483 and that accented characters are not
12487 glyph, but built of
12491 characters, the accent and the letter.
12492 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12498 If you search for example for the French word
12499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12506 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12515 and not for the glyph
12516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12520 \begin_inset space ~
12524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12530 \begin_layout Itemize
12531 If you do not like the look of
12539 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12560 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 serif and typewriter fonts,
12568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12569 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12585 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12586 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12590 \begin_inset space \space{}
12598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12602 \begin_inset space \space{}
12608 \begin_inset space ~
12616 \begin_inset space ~
12626 but you can also select your own.
12627 \begin_inset Newline newline
12630 The differences between roman,
12633 \begin_inset space ~
12642 fonts are explained in section
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12649 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12654 \begin_inset Newline newline
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12665 was originally designed for newspapers.
12666 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12667 into the small newspaper columns.
12671 \begin_inset space ~
12676 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12679 \begin_layout Standard
12680 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12693 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12698 depends on the class you are using.
12699 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12702 \begin_layout Standard
12703 Note that the font size is the
12708 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12709 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12710 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12713 \begin_inset space ~
12719 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12720 \begin_inset space ~
12724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12726 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12733 \begin_layout Standard
12737 \begin_inset space ~
12742 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12744 \begin_inset space ~
12747 serif or typewriter.
12752 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12762 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12765 \begin_layout Standard
12774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12783 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12789 \begin_inset Index idx
12792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12793 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12799 \begin_inset space ~
12803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12805 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12810 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12811 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12818 \begin_layout Standard
12819 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12821 Use Old Style Figures
12825 Use True Small Caps
12828 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12831 Use Old Style Figures
12833 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12835 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12843 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12847 Use True Small Caps
12849 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12850 of scaled capitals.
12851 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12852 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12855 \begin_layout Standard
12860 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12861 a font to display the script characters.
12865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12866 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12871 \begin_inset Index idx
12874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12875 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12880 So this has no effect for the document language
12894 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12898 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12906 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12910 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12911 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12912 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12914 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12917 dialog, see section
12918 \begin_inset space ~
12922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12924 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12936 \begin_layout Subsection
12937 Using Different Character Styles
12938 \begin_inset Index idx
12941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12948 \begin_inset Index idx
12951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12960 \begin_layout Standard
12961 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12962 certain paragraph environments.
12963 LyX supports two character styles,
12972 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12976 \begin_layout Standard
12981 style, do one of the following:
12984 \begin_layout Itemize
12985 click on the toolbar button
12994 \begin_layout Itemize
12995 use the key binding
13004 \begin_layout Standard
13005 These commands are all toggles.
13010 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13013 \begin_layout Standard
13014 One typically uses the
13018 style for proper names.
13020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13027 is the original author of LyX.
13028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13034 \begin_layout Standard
13035 A more widely used character style is the
13040 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13047 \begin_layout Itemize
13048 clicking on the toolbar button
13057 \begin_layout Itemize
13058 using the keybindings
13067 \begin_layout Standard
13072 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13073 es use a different font.
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13077 We've been using the
13081 style all over the place in this document.
13082 Here's one more example:
13085 \begin_layout Quotation
13088 Do not overuse character styles!
13091 \begin_layout Standard
13092 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13093 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13094 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13095 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13099 \begin_layout Standard
13100 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13108 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13110 \begin_inset space ~
13113 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13119 arg "dialog-show character"
13125 \begin_layout Subsection
13126 Fine-Tuning with the
13131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13133 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13138 \begin_inset Index idx
13141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13150 \begin_layout Standard
13151 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13152 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13153 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13154 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13155 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13156 from ordinary dialog.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13161 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13162 \begin_inset Newline newline
13165 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13166 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13169 \begin_layout Standard
13170 To use custom character styles, open the
13172 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13177 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13180 dialog or press the toolbar button
13183 arg "dialog-show character"
13187 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13188 font property that you can choose.
13189 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13192 \begin_inset space ~
13197 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13202 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13203 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13204 environments all at once.
13207 \begin_layout Standard
13208 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13211 \begin_inset space ~
13223 \begin_layout Labeling
13224 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13238 The possible options are:
13242 \begin_layout Labeling
13243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13248 This is the Roman font family.
13249 Normally a serif font.
13250 It's also the default family.
13260 \begin_layout Labeling
13261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13272 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13284 \begin_layout Labeling
13285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13292 This is the Typewriter font family.
13298 arg "font-typewriter"
13307 \begin_layout Labeling
13308 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13313 This corresponds to the print weight.
13318 \begin_layout Labeling
13319 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13324 This is the Medium font series.
13325 It's also the default series.
13328 \begin_layout Labeling
13329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13336 This is the Bold font series.
13349 \begin_layout Labeling
13350 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13355 As the name implies.
13360 \begin_layout Labeling
13361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13366 This is the Upright font shape.
13367 It's also the default shape.
13370 \begin_layout Labeling
13371 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13385 s the Italic font shape
13391 \begin_layout Labeling
13392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13399 This is the Slanted font shape
13401 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13404 \begin_layout Labeling
13405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13409 \begin_inset space ~
13416 This is the Small caps font shape
13423 \begin_layout Labeling
13424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13429 Alters the text color.
13430 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13439 , which means that the document default color set in
13441 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13442 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13453 is used, you can choose between
13486 \begin_inset Index idx
13489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13498 \begin_layout Labeling
13499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13504 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13505 the language of the document.
13506 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13508 \begin_inset Newline newline
13511 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13512 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13513 When using the spell checking (see section
13514 \begin_inset space ~
13518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13520 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13524 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13533 Alters the size of the font.
13534 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13535 proportional to the document font size.
13536 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13537 what you want to do.
13542 \begin_layout Labeling
13543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13564 arg "font-size tiny"
13570 \begin_layout Labeling
13571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13592 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13598 \begin_layout Labeling
13599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13620 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13626 \begin_layout Labeling
13627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13648 arg "font-size small"
13654 \begin_layout Labeling
13655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13669 It's also the default size.
13673 arg "font-size normal"
13679 \begin_layout Labeling
13680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13701 arg "font-size large"
13707 \begin_layout Labeling
13708 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13729 arg "font-size larger"
13735 \begin_layout Labeling
13736 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13757 arg "font-size largest"
13763 \begin_layout Labeling
13764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13785 arg "font-size huge"
13791 \begin_layout Labeling
13792 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13813 arg "font-size giant"
13819 \begin_layout Labeling
13820 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13825 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13845 arg "font-size increase"
13851 \begin_layout Labeling
13852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13857 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13877 arg "font-size decrease"
13884 \begin_layout Standard
13889 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13890 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13891 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13892 — use those instead.
13893 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13896 \begin_layout Labeling
13897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13902 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13907 \begin_layout Labeling
13908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13915 This is text with emphasize on
13918 This might seem like the same as
13922 , but it is actually a bit different.
13928 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13930 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13933 \begin_layout Labeling
13934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13941 This is text with Underbar on.
13947 arg "font-underline"
13953 \begin_inset Newline newline
13958 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13959 when you could not change fonts.
13960 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13961 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13965 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13968 \begin_layout Labeling
13969 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13973 \begin_inset space ~
13980 This is text with Double underbar on.
13986 arg "font-underunderline"
13990 \begin_inset Newline newline
13993 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13994 about double underbar.
13997 \begin_layout Labeling
13998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14002 \begin_inset space ~
14009 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14015 arg "font-underwave"
14019 \begin_inset Newline newline
14022 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14023 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14034 This is text with Strikeout on.
14040 arg "font-strikeout"
14044 \begin_inset Newline newline
14047 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14048 changed in the meantime.
14051 \begin_layout Labeling
14052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14059 This is text with Noun on.
14066 , this is a logical attribute.
14067 Normally it's equivalent to
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14079 \begin_layout Standard
14080 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14081 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14083 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14085 \begin_inset space ~
14088 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14094 arg "dialog-show character"
14097 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14098 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14101 arg "textstyle-apply"
14105 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14109 \begin_layout Standard
14110 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14117 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14118 (suppose you just set the shape to
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14137 \begin_inset space ~
14149 \begin_layout Standard
14150 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14170 \begin_layout Itemize
14176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14183 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14201 \begin_inset Newline newline
14205 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14219 \begin_inset Note Note
14222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14223 For more on phantoms see section
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14230 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14240 \begin_inset Newline newline
14246 \begin_layout Itemize
14251 fonts use characters with serifs.
14252 These are the small
14253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14260 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14261 The following example shows the difference:
14262 \begin_inset Newline newline
14266 \begin_inset Newline newline
14271 text without serifs
14274 \begin_inset Newline newline
14277 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14278 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14285 \begin_layout Itemize
14290 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14291 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14292 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14295 \begin_layout Standard
14296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14303 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14304 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14307 \begin_inset space ~
14312 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14313 the property to be removed.
14314 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14315 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14316 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14334 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14335 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14343 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14347 \begin_inset space ~
14352 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14363 If you, for example, set
14364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14382 \begin_inset space ~
14387 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14396 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14399 \begin_layout Standard
14400 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14401 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14404 \begin_layout Section
14405 Printing and Previewing
14408 \begin_layout Subsection
14412 \begin_layout Standard
14413 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14414 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14415 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14416 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14417 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14419 Additional Features
14424 \begin_layout Standard
14425 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14426 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14427 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14428 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14429 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14430 This happens in two stages:
14433 \begin_layout Enumerate
14434 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14435 generating a file with the extension,
14436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 \begin_layout Enumerate
14451 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14455 file to produce printable output.
14458 \begin_layout Subsection
14459 Output file formats
14460 \begin_inset Index idx
14463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14472 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14480 Simple text (ASCII)
14481 \begin_inset Index idx
14484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 File formats ! ASCII
14493 \begin_layout Standard
14494 This file type has the extension
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14507 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14511 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14518 \begin_layout Standard
14519 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14521 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14522 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14524 \begin_inset space ~
14530 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14531 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14532 \begin_inset space ~
14536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14538 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14543 If your document includes such material, use
14545 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14546 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14548 \begin_inset space ~
14552 \begin_inset space ~
14556 \begin_inset space ~
14564 \begin_inset space ~
14568 \begin_inset space ~
14574 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14575 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14580 \begin_inset Index idx
14583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14584 File formats ! LaTeX
14592 \begin_layout Standard
14593 This file type has the extension
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14605 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14607 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14608 it manually with console commands.
14609 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14610 you view or export your document.
14613 \begin_layout Standard
14614 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14616 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14617 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14632 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14633 \begin_inset space ~
14637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14639 reference "sub:Export"
14646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14648 \begin_inset Index idx
14651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14660 \begin_layout Standard
14661 This file type has the extension
14662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14682 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14683 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14684 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14688 \begin_layout Standard
14689 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14690 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14691 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14692 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14693 when you view the DVI.
14694 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14697 \begin_layout Standard
14698 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14700 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14701 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14706 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14707 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14726 The latter option uses the program
14735 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14736 font access (see section
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14743 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14748 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14749 standard TeX processor.
14752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14754 \begin_inset Index idx
14757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14758 File formats ! PostScript
14766 \begin_layout Standard
14767 This file type has the extension
14768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14780 PostScript was developed by the company
14784 as a printer language.
14785 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14787 PostScript can be seen as a
14788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14791 programming language
14792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14795 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14800 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14806 \begin_inset Index idx
14809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14810 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14820 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14823 \begin_layout Standard
14824 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14828 Encapsulated PostScript
14829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14832 (EPS, file extension
14833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14845 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14846 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14847 If, for example, you have 50
14848 \begin_inset space ~
14851 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14852 \begin_inset space ~
14855 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14856 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14857 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14858 EPS to avoid this problem.
14861 \begin_layout Standard
14862 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14864 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14865 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14873 \begin_inset Index idx
14876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14883 \begin_inset Index idx
14886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14895 \begin_layout Standard
14896 This file type has the extension
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14913 Portable Document Format
14914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14921 was derived from PostScript.
14922 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14931 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14932 looks exactly the same.
14935 \begin_layout Standard
14936 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14940 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14944 (JPG, file extension
14945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14972 Portable Network Graphics
14973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14976 (PNG, file extension
14977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14989 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14990 background to one of these formats.
14991 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14992 will slow down your workflow.
14993 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14996 \begin_layout Standard
14997 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14999 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15005 \begin_layout Description
15007 \begin_inset space ~
15010 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15014 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15017 \begin_layout Description
15019 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15033 X) This uses the program
15037 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15042 is a new engine, derived from
15046 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15047 access (see section
15048 \begin_inset space ~
15052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15054 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15059 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15060 standard TeX processor.
15063 \begin_layout Description
15065 \begin_inset space ~
15072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15079 X) This uses the program
15083 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15088 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15089 font access (see section
15090 \begin_inset space ~
15094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15096 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15101 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15102 vertically written Japanese.
15105 \begin_layout Description
15107 \begin_inset space ~
15110 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15114 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15118 \begin_layout Description
15120 \begin_inset space ~
15123 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15127 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15128 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15132 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15133 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15136 \begin_layout Standard
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15149 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15150 works without problems.
15151 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15152 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15175 \begin_inset space ~
15182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15191 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15201 \begin_inset Index idx
15204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15205 FileFormats ! XHTML
15211 \begin_inset Index idx
15214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15223 \begin_layout Standard
15224 This file type has the extension
15225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15237 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15238 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15239 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15240 suitable for the purpose.
15241 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15243 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15244 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15247 between different formats, which are described in section
15249 Math Output in XHTML
15254 \begin_inset space ~
15262 \begin_layout Standard
15263 XHTML output remains
15264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15271 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15274 LyX and the World Wide Web
15278 Additional Features
15280 manual, for more information.
15283 \begin_layout Standard
15284 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15286 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15287 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15293 \begin_layout Subsection
15295 \begin_inset Index idx
15298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 \begin_layout Standard
15308 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15309 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15318 or use the toolbar button
15325 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15326 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15333 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15337 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15345 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15350 Further output formats can be selected via
15352 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15353 View (Other Formats)
15355 or the toolbar button
15356 \begin_inset Graphics
15357 filename ../images/view-others.png
15359 groupId toolbarbuttons
15366 \begin_layout Standard
15367 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15368 viewer window using the menu
15370 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15375 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15376 Update (Other Formats)
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15384 To have a real output, export your document.
15387 \begin_layout Subsection
15388 Printing the File from within LyX
15389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15391 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15398 \begin_layout Standard
15399 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15400 it directly from within LyX.
15401 To print a file, select the menu
15403 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15409 arg "dialog-show print"
15412 ) or click on the toolbar button
15415 arg "dialog-show print"
15419 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15420 This file is then processed by the program
15424 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15429 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15432 \begin_layout Standard
15433 You can set the following print parameters in the
15436 \begin_inset space ~
15444 \begin_layout Labeling
15445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15450 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15455 Note that this printer name is for the program
15464 has to be configured for this printer name.
15465 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15466 \begin_inset space ~
15470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15472 reference "sub:Printer"
15481 The printer should understand PostScript.
15484 \begin_layout Labeling
15485 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15490 The name of a file to print to.
15491 The output will be a PostScript file.
15492 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15496 \begin_layout Standard
15497 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15498 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15499 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15500 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15501 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15502 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15503 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15506 \begin_layout Section
15507 A few Words about Typography
15508 \begin_inset Index idx
15511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15520 \begin_layout Subsection
15521 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15557 character comes in four lengths: the
15569 , and the minus sign:
15570 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15576 \begin_layout Standard
15577 \begin_inset Tabular
15578 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15579 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15580 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15581 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15583 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15612 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15677 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15679 \begin_inset space ~
15682 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15689 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15714 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15716 \begin_inset space ~
15719 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15740 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15774 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15780 \begin_layout Standard
15781 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15793 character multiple times in a row.
15794 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15795 the final output, but not in LyX.
15797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15827 \begin_layout Standard
15828 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15829 math mode and has a length of its own.
15830 Here are some examples:
15833 \begin_layout Enumerate
15834 line- and page-breaks
15835 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15845 \begin_layout Enumerate
15847 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15857 \begin_layout Enumerate
15858 Oh — there's a dash.
15859 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15869 \begin_layout Enumerate
15870 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15874 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15884 \begin_layout Subsection
15886 \begin_inset Index idx
15889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15898 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15905 \begin_layout Standard
15906 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15907 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15912 \begin_inset Index idx
15915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15916 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15921 following the rules of the document language.
15924 \begin_layout Standard
15925 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15930 font and with unusual constructs, like
15931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15939 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15941 This is done with the menu
15943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15944 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15946 \begin_inset space ~
15952 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15953 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15956 \begin_layout Standard
15957 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15958 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15968 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15976 as a hyphenation possibility.
15977 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15978 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15979 as described in section
15980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15983 Prevent Hyphenation
15984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15990 \begin_inset space ~
15998 \begin_layout Subsection
16000 \begin_inset Index idx
16003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16013 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16016 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16025 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16026 LaTeX then adds the
16027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16030 appropriate amount of space.
16031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16034 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16036 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16037 gets after another word.
16040 \begin_layout Standard
16041 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16042 not work in all cases.
16044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16055 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16056 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16060 Here are some examples of
16064 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16067 \begin_layout Itemize
16072 \begin_layout Itemize
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16081 \begin_layout Itemize
16083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16087 this is too much space!
16090 \begin_layout Itemize
16095 \begin_layout Standard
16096 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16099 \begin_layout Standard
16100 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16103 \begin_layout Enumerate
16107 \begin_inset space ~
16112 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16113 \begin_inset space ~
16117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16119 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16124 \begin_inset Index idx
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16128 Spaces ! inter-word
16136 \begin_layout Enumerate
16140 \begin_inset space ~
16145 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16146 \begin_inset space ~
16150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16152 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16157 \begin_inset Index idx
16160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 \begin_layout Enumerate
16173 \begin_inset space ~
16177 \begin_inset space ~
16181 \begin_inset space ~
16188 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16190 \begin_inset space ~
16195 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16196 This function is also bound to
16199 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16205 \begin_layout Standard
16206 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16209 \begin_layout Itemize
16211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16215 \begin_inset space \space{}
16218 this is too much space!
16221 \begin_layout Itemize
16222 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16226 \begin_layout Standard
16227 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16228 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16229 will take care of this.
16232 \begin_layout Standard
16233 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16242 feature described in the section
16248 Additional Features
16253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16255 \begin_inset Index idx
16258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16259 Typography ! Quotes
16265 \begin_inset Index idx
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16299 \begin_layout Standard
16300 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16301 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16302 and use a closing quote at the end.
16304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16312 The keyboard character,
16316 , generates this automatically.
16319 \begin_layout Standard
16320 You can specify what character the
16324 key produces using the submenu
16330 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16334 \begin_inset Index idx
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 Document ! Settings
16348 There are six choices:
16351 \begin_layout Labeling
16352 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 \begin_layout Labeling
16376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16379 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16383 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16389 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16393 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16399 \begin_layout Labeling
16400 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16403 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16407 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16413 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16417 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16423 \begin_layout Labeling
16424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16427 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16431 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16437 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16441 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16447 \begin_layout Labeling
16448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16451 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16461 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16465 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16471 \begin_layout Labeling
16472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16475 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16479 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16485 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16489 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16496 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16499 arg "quote-insert single"
16505 \begin_layout Subsection
16507 \begin_inset Index idx
16510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16511 Typography ! Ligatures
16517 \begin_inset Index idx
16520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16551 name "sub:Ligatures"
16558 \begin_layout Standard
16559 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16560 print them as single characters.
16561 These groups are known as
16566 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16568 Here are the standard ligatures:
16571 \begin_layout Itemize
16575 \begin_layout Itemize
16579 \begin_layout Itemize
16583 \begin_layout Itemize
16587 \begin_layout Itemize
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16592 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16596 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16597 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16605 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16621 To break a ligature, use
16623 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16624 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16626 \begin_inset space ~
16633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16644 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16661 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16669 \begin_layout Subsection
16671 \begin_inset Index idx
16674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16683 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16690 \begin_layout Standard
16691 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16692 characters in different sizes and heights.
16693 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16694 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16714 \begin_inset Note Note
16717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16718 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16726 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16727 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16732 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16733 following proper names:
16736 \begin_layout Description
16737 LyX The name of the game, write
16738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16759 \begin_layout Description
16760 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16782 \begin_layout Description
16783 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16805 \begin_layout Description
16806 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16828 \begin_layout Standard
16829 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16834 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16842 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16843 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16844 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16847 : The actual version is
16848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16855 , the previous one was
16856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16866 \begin_layout Standard
16867 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16868 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16869 In LyX this will look like
16870 \begin_inset Graphics
16871 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16877 \begin_inset Newline newline
16880 For more about TeX Code, see section
16881 \begin_inset space ~
16885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16887 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16894 \begin_layout Subsection
16896 \begin_inset Index idx
16899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16908 \begin_layout Standard
16909 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16910 space between two words.
16911 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16921 for units use the menu
16923 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16924 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16926 \begin_inset space ~
16934 arg "space-insert thin"
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16941 Here is an example to show the differences:
16944 \begin_layout Standard
16945 \begin_inset Tabular
16946 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16947 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16948 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16949 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16956 \begin_inset space ~
16960 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16972 space between number and unit
16979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16988 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17000 half space between number and unit
17013 \begin_layout Subsection
17015 \begin_inset Index idx
17018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17019 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17027 \begin_layout Standard
17028 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17030 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17031 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
17032 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
17033 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
17034 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17035 These bits of text became known as
17046 \begin_layout Standard
17047 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17048 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17049 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17050 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17051 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17052 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17053 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
17056 \begin_layout Standard
17057 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
17058 tweak that behavior.
17059 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
17060 \begin_inset space ~
17064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17066 key "latexcompanion"
17071 \begin_inset space ~
17075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17081 ) may have more information.
17082 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
17085 \begin_layout Chapter
17086 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17089 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17096 \begin_layout Standard
17097 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17100 \begin_inset space ~
17106 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17109 \begin_layout Section
17111 \begin_inset Index idx
17114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17130 \begin_layout Standard
17131 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17134 \begin_layout Description
17136 \begin_inset space ~
17139 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17140 \begin_inset Newline newline
17144 \begin_inset Note Note
17147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17148 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17156 \begin_layout Description
17157 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17158 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17160 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17161 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17174 \begin_inset space ~
17180 \begin_inset Newline newline
17184 \begin_inset Note Comment
17187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17188 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17196 \begin_layout Description
17198 \begin_inset space ~
17201 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17202 set in the document settings under
17204 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17212 \begin_inset Newline newline
17216 \begin_inset Newline newline
17220 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17229 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17230 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17235 of a comment that appears in the output.
17241 \begin_inset Newline newline
17245 \begin_inset Newline newline
17248 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17260 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17264 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17267 \begin_layout Section
17269 \begin_inset Index idx
17272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17279 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17281 name "sec:Footnotes"
17288 \begin_layout Standard
17289 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17292 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17295 or the toolbar button
17298 arg "footnote-insert"
17310 \begin_inset Graphics
17311 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17320 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17349 label, the box will
17353 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17354 Clicking on the box label again will close
17367 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17368 and click on the footnote
17383 \begin_layout Standard
17384 Here is an example footnote:
17392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17393 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17401 \begin_layout Standard
17402 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17403 position where the footnote box is placed.
17404 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17405 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17406 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17407 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17412 ey are described in the
17415 \begin_inset space ~
17423 \begin_layout Section
17425 \begin_inset Index idx
17428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17437 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17444 \begin_layout Standard
17445 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17446 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17450 \begin_inset space ~
17455 or the toolbar button
17458 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17484 appearing within your text.
17485 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17494 \begin_layout Standard
17495 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17499 \begin_inset Marginal
17502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17504 This is a marginal note.
17512 \begin_layout Standard
17513 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17514 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17515 pages, right on odd pages.
17518 \begin_layout Standard
17519 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17522 \begin_inset space ~
17530 \begin_inset space ~
17538 \begin_layout Section
17539 Graphics and Images
17540 \begin_inset Index idx
17543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17550 \begin_inset Index idx
17553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17562 name "sec:Graphics"
17569 \begin_layout Standard
17570 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17571 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17574 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17579 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17583 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17586 \begin_layout Standard
17587 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17592 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17593 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17595 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17596 \begin_inset space ~
17600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17602 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17609 \begin_layout Standard
17614 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17615 of the image in the output.
17616 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17620 \begin_inset space ~
17624 \begin_inset space ~
17633 \begin_inset space ~
17637 \begin_inset space ~
17641 \begin_inset space ~
17646 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17647 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17655 \begin_layout Standard
17662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17674 \begin_inset space ~
17681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17690 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17691 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17695 \begin_inset space ~
17700 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17701 with the image size is printed.
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17709 \begin_inset space ~
17713 \begin_inset space ~
17718 is explained in the
17721 \begin_inset space ~
17733 \begin_layout Standard
17734 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17735 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17737 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17740 \begin_layout Standard
17742 \begin_inset Graphics
17743 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17751 \begin_layout Standard
17752 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17753 the image into a float, see section
17754 \begin_inset space ~
17758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17760 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17767 \begin_layout Subsection
17769 \begin_inset Index idx
17772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17781 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17788 \begin_layout Standard
17789 You can insert images in any known file format.
17790 But as we explained in section
17791 \begin_inset space ~
17795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17797 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17801 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17802 LyX therefore uses the program
17806 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17807 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17808 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17809 \begin_inset space ~
17813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17815 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17822 \begin_layout Standard
17823 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17826 \begin_layout Description
17828 \begin_inset space ~
17831 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17832 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17833 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17837 Graphics Interchange Format
17838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17841 (GIF, file extension
17842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17854 \begin_inset Index idx
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17889 Portable Network Graphics
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17893 (PNG, file extension
17894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17906 \begin_inset Index idx
17909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17941 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17945 (JPG, file extension
17946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17970 \begin_inset Index idx
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18004 \begin_layout Description
18006 \begin_inset space ~
18009 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18011 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18012 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18013 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18014 \begin_inset Newline newline
18017 Scalable image formats can be
18018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18021 Scalable Vector Graphics
18022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18025 (SVG, file extension
18026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18038 \begin_inset Index idx
18041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18073 Encapsulated PostScript
18074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18077 (EPS, file extension
18078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18090 \begin_inset Index idx
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18125 Portable Document Format
18126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18129 (PDF, file extension
18130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18142 \begin_inset Index idx
18145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18160 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18161 result will not be scalable.
18162 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18176 \begin_layout Standard
18177 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18184 \begin_layout Subsection
18185 Grouping of Image Settings
18186 \begin_inset Index idx
18189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18190 Images ! Settings grouping
18198 \begin_layout Standard
18199 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18201 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18202 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18204 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18205 need to manually change each of them.
18209 \begin_layout Standard
18210 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18213 \begin_inset space ~
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 \begin_inset space ~
18244 \begin_inset space ~
18251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18261 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18262 and checking the name of the desired group.
18265 \begin_layout Section
18267 \begin_inset Index idx
18270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18286 \begin_layout Standard
18287 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18290 arg "tabular-insert"
18295 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18299 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18300 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18301 from the rest of the table.
18302 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18303 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18305 Here is an example table:
18308 \begin_layout Standard
18310 \begin_inset Tabular
18311 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18312 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18313 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18316 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18516 \begin_layout Subsection
18520 \begin_layout Standard
18521 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18524 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18528 This brings up the table dialog.
18529 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18530 cursor is placed currently.
18531 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18532 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18533 done on all of your selection.
18536 \begin_layout Standard
18537 In addition to the table dialog, the
18540 \begin_inset space ~
18545 helps you in setting table properties.
18546 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18549 \begin_layout Standard
18553 \begin_inset space ~
18558 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18559 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18560 current cell respectively.
18561 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18563 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18564 of text, see section
18565 \begin_inset space ~
18569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18571 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18578 \begin_layout Standard
18579 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18580 using the check box
18589 This will merge the cells to
18593 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18594 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18595 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18596 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18597 in the last row without the upper border:
18600 \begin_layout Standard
18602 \begin_inset Tabular
18603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18604 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18606 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18619 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18628 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18704 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18739 \begin_layout Standard
18740 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18741 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18742 explained in the chapter
18749 \begin_inset space ~
18755 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18759 degrees counterclockwise.
18760 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18763 \begin_layout Standard
18764 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18772 Most DVI-viewers are
18776 able to display rotations.
18784 \begin_layout Standard
18789 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18794 adds lines for all cell borders.
18797 \begin_layout Subsection
18799 \begin_inset Index idx
18802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18803 Tables ! Longtables
18809 \begin_inset Index idx
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 \begin_layout Standard
18822 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18825 \begin_inset space ~
18829 \begin_inset space ~
18838 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18839 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18842 \begin_layout Description
18847 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18848 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18849 except for the first page, if
18852 \begin_inset space ~
18860 \begin_layout Description
18864 \begin_inset space ~
18869 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18870 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18873 \begin_layout Description
18878 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18879 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18880 except for the last page, if
18883 \begin_inset space ~
18891 \begin_layout Description
18895 \begin_inset space ~
18900 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18901 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18904 \begin_layout Description
18905 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18906 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18908 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18912 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18915 \begin_inset space ~
18923 \begin_layout Standard
18924 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18925 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18926 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18932 In this context, first means first in this order:
18935 \begin_inset space ~
18947 \begin_inset space ~
18952 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18955 \begin_layout Standard
18957 \begin_inset Tabular
18958 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18959 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18960 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18961 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18962 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18963 <row endfirsthead="true">
18964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18970 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18975 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18984 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18994 <row endfirsthead="true">
18995 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19006 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 <row endhead="true">
19028 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19039 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19058 <row endhead="true">
19059 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19070 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19079 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <row endfoot="true">
19092 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19103 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19143 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20084 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20093 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20102 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20113 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20423 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20485 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20516 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20547 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20640 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20671 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20702 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20857 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20919 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21012 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <row endlastfoot="true">
21074 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 \begin_layout Subsection
21113 \begin_inset Index idx
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21125 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21132 \begin_layout Standard
21133 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21134 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21135 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21136 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21140 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21143 \begin_layout Standard
21144 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21145 for the column in the table dialog.
21146 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21147 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21151 \begin_layout Standard
21153 \begin_inset Tabular
21154 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21155 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21157 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 This is longer now.
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21360 This is longer now.
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 \begin_layout Standard
21392 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21393 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21399 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21405 Selection with the mouse or with
21409 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21410 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21411 the selection from outside the table.
21414 \begin_layout Section
21416 \begin_inset Index idx
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21435 \begin_layout Subsection
21439 \begin_layout Standard
21440 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21441 have a fixed location.
21443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21450 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21458 \begin_inset space ~
21463 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21464 too many notes on the current page.
21467 \begin_layout Standard
21468 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21469 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21470 and pages without text.
21471 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21472 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21473 Floats are therefore numbered.
21474 Referencing is described in section
21475 \begin_inset space ~
21479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21481 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21488 \begin_layout Standard
21489 To insert a float, use the menu
21491 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21495 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21496 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21498 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21499 \begin_inset Index idx
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21509 paragraph within the float.
21510 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21511 by left-clicking on the box label.
21512 A closed float box looks like this:
21513 \begin_inset Graphics
21514 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21519 – a gray button with a red label.
21522 \begin_layout Standard
21523 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21524 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21527 \begin_layout Subsection
21531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21535 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21540 \begin_inset Index idx
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21544 Floats ! Figure floats
21552 \begin_layout Standard
21554 \begin_inset space ~
21558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21560 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21564 was created using the menu
21566 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21567 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21573 arg "float-insert figure"
21577 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21580 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21586 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21590 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21591 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21593 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21595 \begin_inset space ~
21603 arg "layout-paragraph"
21609 \begin_layout Standard
21610 \begin_inset Float figure
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 \begin_inset Graphics
21618 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21633 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21637 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21650 \begin_layout Standard
21651 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21652 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21654 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21663 ) and refer to it using the menu
21665 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21671 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21675 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21676 vague references like
21677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21684 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21694 For more about cross-references, see section
21695 \begin_inset space ~
21699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21701 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21708 \begin_layout Standard
21709 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21710 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21711 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21712 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21713 as described in section
21714 \begin_inset space ~
21718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21720 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21726 \begin_inset space ~
21730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21732 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21736 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21737 You can also set the images one below the other.
21739 \begin_inset space ~
21743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21745 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21752 reference "fig:Platypus"
21756 are the subfigures.
21759 \begin_layout Standard
21760 \begin_inset Float figure
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21770 \begin_inset Float figure
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21781 name "fig:Undefinable"
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 \begin_inset Graphics
21795 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21806 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21810 \begin_inset Float figure
21815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21816 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21821 name "fig:Platypus"
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 \begin_inset Graphics
21835 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21847 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21859 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21863 Two distorted images.
21876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21878 \begin_inset Index idx
21881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 Floats ! Table floats
21890 \begin_layout Standard
21891 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21893 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21894 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21897 or the toolbar button
21900 arg "float-insert table"
21904 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21905 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21906 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21908 \begin_inset space ~
21912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21914 reference "tab:Table-float"
21921 \begin_layout Standard
21922 \begin_inset Float table
21927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21933 name "tab:Table-float"
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 \begin_inset Tabular
21948 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21949 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21950 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21951 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22079 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22103 \end{array}\right]$
22111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22124 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22145 \begin_layout Subsection
22147 \begin_inset Index idx
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 \begin_layout Standard
22160 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22161 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22162 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22164 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22172 \begin_inset space ~
22180 \begin_layout Section
22182 \begin_inset Index idx
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 \begin_layout Standard
22195 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22197 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22198 \begin_inset space \space{}
22205 \begin_layout Standard
22206 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22208 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22212 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22213 and its alignment within the page.
22216 \begin_layout Standard
22218 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22228 height_special "totalheight"
22231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22234 This is a minipage.
22235 The text is set in an italic style.
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22241 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22242 another formatting.
22250 \begin_layout Standard
22251 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22254 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22258 as described in section
22259 \begin_inset space ~
22263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22265 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22270 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22276 \begin_layout Standard
22277 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22287 height_special "totalheight"
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22292 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22298 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22302 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22312 height_special "totalheight"
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22317 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22325 \begin_layout Standard
22326 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22332 \begin_layout Standard
22333 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22335 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22342 \begin_inset space ~
22350 \begin_layout Chapter
22351 Mathematical Formulas
22352 \begin_inset Index idx
22355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 \begin_inset Index idx
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22396 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22403 \begin_layout Standard
22404 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22409 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22412 \begin_layout Section
22414 \begin_inset Index idx
22417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 \begin_layout Standard
22427 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22440 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22442 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22443 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22444 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22446 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22452 \begin_layout Standard
22453 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22457 \begin_inset space ~
22462 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22465 \begin_layout Standard
22466 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22467 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22470 \begin_layout Standard
22471 This is a line with an inline formula
22472 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22478 \begin_layout Standard
22479 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22480 paragraph, like this one:
22481 \begin_inset Formula
22488 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22491 \begin_layout Standard
22492 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22493 For example, typing
22494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22507 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22508 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22512 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22515 \begin_inset space ~
22523 \begin_layout Subsection
22524 Navigating in Formulas
22525 \begin_inset Index idx
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22537 \begin_layout Standard
22538 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22539 achieved with the arrow keys.
22540 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22541 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22546 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22547 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22551 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22555 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22558 \end{array}\right]$
22566 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22571 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22572 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22575 \begin_layout Standard
22580 , printed in this document as
22581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22585 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22592 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22593 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22594 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22599 For example, if you want
22600 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22608 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22618 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22622 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22627 , since in the latter case only the
22630 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22635 will be under the square root sign:
22636 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22642 \begin_layout Standard
22643 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22645 \begin_inset Formula
22647 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22656 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22657 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22660 \begin_layout Subsection
22664 \begin_layout Standard
22665 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22666 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22670 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22671 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22672 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22673 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22674 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22677 \begin_layout Subsection
22678 Exponents and Subscripts
22679 \begin_inset Index idx
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 \begin_inset Index idx
22692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 \begin_layout Standard
22702 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22705 arg "math-superscript"
22711 arg "math-subscript"
22714 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22716 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22719 , type in a formula
22722 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22732 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22738 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22742 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22748 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22754 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22763 , you have to use an extra
22767 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22768 For example, if you want
22769 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22775 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22781 Subscripts are similar: To get
22782 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22788 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22796 \begin_layout Subsection
22798 \begin_inset Index idx
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 \begin_layout Standard
22811 Create a fraction either with the command
22817 or by using the icon
22820 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22826 \begin_inset space ~
22832 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22833 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22834 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22839 To move back up, press
22844 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22845 \begin_inset Formula
22847 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22850 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22858 \begin_layout Subsection
22860 \begin_inset Index idx
22863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 \begin_layout Standard
22873 Roots can be created using the
22876 \begin_inset space ~
22884 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22890 arg "math-insert \\root"
22912 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22918 always produces a square root.
22921 \begin_layout Subsection
22922 Operators with Limits
22923 \begin_inset Index idx
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22933 \begin_inset Index idx
22936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22945 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22952 \begin_layout Standard
22954 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22958 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22961 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22962 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22963 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22964 The sum operator will automatically place its
22965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22972 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22974 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22978 \begin_inset Formula
22980 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22985 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22989 \begin_layout Standard
22990 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22992 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22993 behind the operator and using the menu
22995 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22996 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22998 \begin_inset space ~
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23016 \begin_layout Standard
23017 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23026 \begin_inset Index idx
23029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 \begin_inset Formula
23038 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23043 which will place the
23044 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23056 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23057 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23063 \begin_layout Standard
23064 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23071 Have a look at section
23072 \begin_inset space ~
23076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23078 reference "sub:Functions"
23082 for an explanation of function macros.
23085 \begin_layout Subsection
23087 \begin_inset Index idx
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 \begin_layout Standard
23100 Most math symbols can be found in the
23103 \begin_inset space ~
23108 under one of several categories; including
23125 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23129 \begin_layout Standard
23130 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23131 you don't have to use the
23134 \begin_inset space ~
23139 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23140 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23143 \begin_layout Subsection
23145 \begin_inset Index idx
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 \begin_layout Standard
23158 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23163 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23169 \begin_inset space ~
23179 arg "math-insert \\space"
23185 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23186 For example, the sequence
23191 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23195 \begin_inset Graphics
23196 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23201 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23202 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23203 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23204 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23206 Here are two examples:
23209 \begin_layout Standard
23219 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23225 \begin_layout Standard
23235 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23241 \begin_layout Subsection
23243 \begin_inset Index idx
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23255 name "sub:Functions"
23262 \begin_layout Standard
23266 \begin_inset space ~
23271 contains under the button
23276 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23281 a number of function macros, such as
23282 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23286 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23294 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23301 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23302 avoid confusions, because
23303 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23307 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23313 \begin_layout Standard
23314 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23316 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23320 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23326 \begin_layout Standard
23327 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23328 are placed, as described in section
23329 \begin_inset space ~
23333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23335 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23342 \begin_layout Subsection
23344 \begin_inset Index idx
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 \begin_layout Standard
23357 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23359 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23360 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23361 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23364 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23365 Our example is entered by typing
23370 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23377 \begin_inset space ~
23381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23383 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23387 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23390 \begin_layout Standard
23391 \begin_inset Float table
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23402 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23406 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 \begin_inset Tabular
23417 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23418 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23420 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23421 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23559 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23883 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23937 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23982 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24003 \begin_layout Standard
24004 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24007 \begin_inset space ~
24015 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24018 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24022 \begin_layout Section
24023 Brackets and Delimiters
24024 \begin_inset Index idx
24027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 \begin_inset Index idx
24037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24046 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24053 \begin_layout Standard
24054 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24055 For some purposes, using just the keys
24060 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24061 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24062 toolbar delimiter icon
24065 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24069 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24070 \begin_inset Formula
24072 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24080 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24081 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24085 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24088 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24094 \begin_inset Formula
24096 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24104 \begin_layout Standard
24105 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24106 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24110 \begin_layout Standard
24111 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24112 left side and right side.
24113 If you use the option
24116 \begin_inset space ~
24121 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24122 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24123 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24128 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24131 \begin_layout Standard
24132 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24133 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24134 is to go inside the brackets.
24135 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24140 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24141 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24142 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24146 arg "math-delim ( )"
24152 \begin_layout Section
24153 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24154 \begin_inset Index idx
24157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 \begin_inset Index idx
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 \begin_inset Index idx
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24186 \begin_layout Standard
24187 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24190 \begin_inset space ~
24200 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24206 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24207 Here is an example:
24208 \begin_inset Formula
24210 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24219 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24220 \begin_inset space ~
24224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24226 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24231 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24232 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24233 This alignment is set in the box
24238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24286 for every column as default.
24287 For example, the sequence
24288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24299 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24300 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24301 corresponds to the relevant column.
24302 The result will look like this:
24303 \begin_inset Formula
24306 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24307 column & has & has\, right\\
24308 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24317 \begin_layout Standard
24318 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24321 arg "newline-insert newline"
24324 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24325 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24327 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24330 or the math toolbar.
24333 \begin_layout Standard
24334 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24335 It can be created with the menu
24337 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24338 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24340 \begin_inset space ~
24352 Here is an example:
24353 \begin_inset Formula
24367 \begin_layout Standard
24368 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24371 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24374 arg "newline-insert newline"
24378 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24383 arg "newline-insert newline"
24386 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24394 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24395 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24396 A new row is created by every further entry of
24399 arg "newline-insert newline"
24403 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24404 Here is an example:
24405 \begin_inset Formula
24407 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24408 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24413 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24414 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24415 \begin_inset Formula
24417 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24425 \begin_layout Standard
24426 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24433 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24434 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24437 reference "eq:asquared"
24442 The other types are described in section
24443 \begin_inset space ~
24447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24449 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24456 \begin_layout Section
24457 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24458 \begin_inset Index idx
24461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 Math ! Formula numbering
24468 \begin_inset Index idx
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 Math ! Referencing formulas
24478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24480 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24487 \begin_layout Standard
24488 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24490 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24491 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24493 \begin_inset space ~
24497 \begin_inset space ~
24505 arg "math-number-toggle"
24509 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24510 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24511 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24512 the document class.
24513 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24514 separated by a dot:
24515 \begin_inset Formula
24525 arg "math-number-toggle"
24528 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24529 You can only number displayed formulas.
24532 \begin_layout Standard
24533 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24535 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24536 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24538 \begin_inset space ~
24542 \begin_inset space ~
24550 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24553 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24554 \begin_inset Formula
24557 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24563 To number all lines use the shortcut
24566 arg "math-number-toggle"
24572 \begin_layout Standard
24573 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24576 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24577 A label is inserted with the menu
24579 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24588 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24589 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24590 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24602 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24603 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24604 We inserted in the following example the label
24605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24612 in the second line:
24613 \begin_inset Formula
24615 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24616 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24621 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24622 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24623 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24625 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24627 \begin_inset space ~
24635 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24639 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24640 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24641 as the formula number:
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24648 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24655 \begin_layout Standard
24656 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24657 \begin_inset space ~
24661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24663 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24668 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24676 \begin_layout Section
24677 User defined math macros
24678 \begin_inset Index idx
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 \begin_layout Standard
24691 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24692 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24693 Math macros are explained in section
24696 \begin_inset space ~
24708 \begin_layout Section
24712 \begin_layout Subsection
24714 \begin_inset Index idx
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 \begin_layout Standard
24727 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24728 To set a font in a formula, use the
24731 \begin_inset space ~
24741 arg "math-insert \\font"
24746 , or enter its command, listed in table
24747 \begin_inset space ~
24751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24753 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24760 \begin_layout Standard
24761 \begin_inset Float table
24766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24767 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24772 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24776 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 \begin_inset Tabular
24787 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24788 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24789 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24876 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24909 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24997 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25024 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 \begin_layout Standard
25059 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25084 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25085 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25090 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25091 space when you need a space in the box.
25092 Here is an example where
25093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25104 denotes the set of numbers:
25105 \begin_inset Formula
25107 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25115 \begin_layout Standard
25116 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25117 You can, for example, put a character in
25126 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25130 \begin_inset Newline newline
25133 So it is better not to use this feature.
25136 \begin_layout Standard
25137 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25138 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25142 \begin_inset Newline newline
25145 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25151 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25152 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25158 \begin_layout Standard
25165 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25171 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25172 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25174 \begin_inset space ~
25182 \begin_layout Subsection
25184 \begin_inset Index idx
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25196 \begin_layout Standard
25197 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25199 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25203 \begin_inset space ~
25207 \begin_inset space ~
25215 \begin_inset space ~
25225 arg "math-insert \\font"
25237 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25238 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25239 Here is an example:
25240 \begin_inset Formula
25243 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25244 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25253 \begin_layout Subsection
25255 \begin_inset Index idx
25258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 \begin_layout Standard
25268 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25269 automatically chosen in most situations.
25287 For most characters,
25295 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25296 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25301 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25302 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25304 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25309 arg "math-insert \\style"
25315 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25316 For example, you can set
25317 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25320 , which is normally in
25329 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25333 The four styles are used in the following example:
25336 \begin_layout Standard
25337 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25341 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25345 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25349 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25355 \begin_layout Standard
25356 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25357 is set in a particular size with the menu
25359 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25361 \begin_inset space ~
25366 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25367 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25368 will be adjusted to correspond.
25369 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25380 \begin_layout Standard
25384 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25390 \begin_layout Section
25392 \begin_inset Index idx
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 \begin_inset Index idx
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25414 \begin_layout Standard
25415 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25416 (AMS) that are in common use.
25419 \begin_layout Subsection
25420 Enabling AMS-Support
25423 \begin_layout Standard
25424 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25425 the document by selecting the checkbox
25428 \begin_inset space ~
25432 \begin_inset space ~
25436 \begin_inset space ~
25443 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25447 \begin_inset Index idx
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 Document ! Settings
25459 \begin_inset space ~
25465 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25466 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25469 \begin_layout Subsection
25471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25473 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25478 \begin_inset Index idx
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25490 \begin_layout Standard
25491 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25492 LyX allows you to choose between
25513 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25514 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25520 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25523 \begin_layout Chapter
25527 \begin_layout Section
25529 \begin_inset Index idx
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25541 name "sec:Cross-References"
25548 \begin_layout Standard
25549 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25550 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25552 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25553 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25554 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25557 \begin_layout Enumerate
25561 \begin_layout Enumerate
25562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25564 name "enu:Second-item"
25571 \begin_layout Enumerate
25575 \begin_layout Standard
25576 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25578 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25581 or by pressing the toolbar button
25588 A gray label box like this:
25589 \begin_inset Graphics
25590 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25595 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25596 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25631 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25632 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25651 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25654 or the toolbar button
25657 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25661 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25662 \begin_inset Graphics
25663 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25668 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25670 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25683 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25687 \begin_layout Standard
25688 As an alternative to
25690 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25693 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
25698 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25699 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25701 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25713 \begin_layout Standard
25714 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25715 \begin_inset space ~
25719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25721 reference "enu:Second-item"
25728 \begin_layout Standard
25729 It is recommended to use a protected space
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 described in section
25735 \begin_inset space ~
25739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25741 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25750 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25751 line breaks between them.
25754 \begin_layout Standard
25755 There are six formats of cross-references:
25758 \begin_layout Description
25759 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25762 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25769 \begin_layout Description
25770 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25771 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25783 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25790 \begin_layout Description
25791 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25792 \begin_inset space ~
25796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25797 LatexCommand pageref
25798 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25805 \begin_layout Description
25807 \begin_inset space ~
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25814 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
25815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25816 LatexCommand vpageref
25817 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25822 \begin_inset Newline newline
25825 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
25826 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
25827 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
25828 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
25829 it prints “on the next page”.
25830 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
25833 \begin_layout Description
25835 \begin_inset space ~
25839 \begin_inset space ~
25843 \begin_inset space ~
25846 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
25847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25849 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25854 \begin_inset Newline newline
25857 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
25863 ; otherwise it behaves like
25867 \begin_inset space ~
25871 \begin_inset space ~
25880 \begin_layout Description
25882 \begin_inset space ~
25885 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25886 \begin_inset Newline newline
25890 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25898 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25907 \begin_inset Index idx
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25911 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25917 \begin_inset Index idx
25920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25932 \begin_inset Newline newline
25935 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25938 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25942 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25943 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25951 is the default and preferred because
25955 supports only English documents.
25956 The format is specified by using the command
25968 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25969 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25982 ) can be done with this command
25983 \begin_inset Newline newline
25990 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25995 \begin_inset Newline newline
25998 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26002 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26009 \begin_layout Description
26011 \begin_inset space ~
26014 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26016 LatexCommand nameref
26017 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26024 \begin_layout Standard
26025 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26026 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26027 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26031 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26035 \begin_layout Standard
26036 You can only use the style
26040 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26044 is always possible.
26047 \begin_layout Standard
26048 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26049 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26051 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26052 \begin_inset space ~
26056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26058 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26065 \begin_layout Standard
26066 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26070 \begin_inset space ~
26074 \begin_inset space ~
26079 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26080 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26083 \begin_inset space ~
26088 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26089 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26092 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26098 \begin_layout Standard
26099 You can change labels at any time.
26100 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26101 do not need to think about this.
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26106 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26107 instead of the reference.
26110 \begin_layout Standard
26111 References are described in detail in the section
26112 \begin_inset space ~
26116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26126 \begin_inset space ~
26134 \begin_layout Section
26135 Table of Contents and other Listings
26136 \begin_inset Index idx
26139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26146 \begin_inset Index idx
26149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26165 \begin_layout Subsection
26167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26169 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26176 \begin_layout Standard
26177 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26179 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26180 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26182 \begin_inset space ~
26186 \begin_inset space ~
26192 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26193 If you click on it, the
26197 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26198 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26199 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26201 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26203 \begin_inset space ~
26208 that is described in section
26209 \begin_inset space ~
26213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26215 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26222 \begin_layout Standard
26223 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26224 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26226 \begin_inset space ~
26230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26232 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26236 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26238 \begin_inset space ~
26242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26244 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26248 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26250 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26253 \begin_layout Subsection
26254 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26257 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26264 \begin_layout Standard
26265 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26266 You can insert them via the
26268 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26272 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26275 \begin_layout Section
26276 URLs and Hyperlinks
26277 \begin_inset Index idx
26280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26287 \begin_inset Index idx
26290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26299 \begin_layout Subsection
26301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26310 \begin_layout Standard
26311 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26313 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26319 \begin_layout Standard
26320 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26321 \begin_inset Flex URL
26324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26334 \begin_layout Standard
26335 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26341 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26345 \begin_layout Standard
26346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26354 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26362 \begin_layout Subsection
26364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26366 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26373 \begin_layout Standard
26374 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26376 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26379 or with the toolbar button
26386 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26395 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26396 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26397 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26399 name "LyX's homepage"
26400 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26404 , an Email address like this:
26405 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26407 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26408 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26413 , or a link to a file.
26416 \begin_layout Standard
26417 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26430 to the link target.
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26435 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26436 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26437 the text style dialog.
26438 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26442 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26444 name "LyX's homepage"
26445 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26452 \begin_layout Standard
26453 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26457 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26459 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26460 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26464 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26466 \begin_inset Newline newline
26474 \begin_inset Newline newline
26481 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26484 \begin_layout Section
26486 \begin_inset Index idx
26489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26498 name "sec:Appendices"
26505 \begin_layout Standard
26506 Appendices are created with the menu
26508 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26510 \begin_inset space ~
26514 \begin_inset space ~
26520 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26521 as the appendix part of the book.
26522 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26525 \begin_layout Standard
26526 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26527 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26528 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26529 and the subsection number.
26530 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26534 \begin_layout Standard
26536 \begin_inset space ~
26540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26542 reference "chap:Credits"
26547 \begin_inset space ~
26551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26553 reference "sub:Export"
26560 \begin_layout Section
26562 \begin_inset Index idx
26565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26574 name "sec:Bibliography"
26581 \begin_layout Standard
26582 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26583 You can include a bibliography database,
26587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26588 Known under the name
26589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26601 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26602 manually, using the paragraph environment
26606 , which was described in section
26607 \begin_inset space ~
26611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26613 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26618 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26619 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26623 use a bibliography database.
26626 \begin_layout Subsection
26627 The Bibliography Environment
26630 \begin_layout Standard
26635 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26637 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26646 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26648 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26657 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26660 \begin_layout Standard
26661 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
26663 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26666 or the toolbar button
26669 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26673 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26674 containing the available citations.
26675 Select one or more keys from the list and
26685 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
26686 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
26690 \begin_layout Standard
26691 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26692 entry with surrounding brackets.
26697 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26698 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26710 \begin_layout Standard
26713 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26718 key "latexcompanion"
26725 \begin_layout Standard
26726 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26727 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
26740 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26742 \begin_inset space ~
26750 arg "layout-paragraph"
26754 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
26757 \begin_layout Subsection
26758 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26759 \begin_inset Index idx
26762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26763 Bibliography ! Databases
26769 \begin_inset Index idx
26772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26773 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26781 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26788 \begin_layout Standard
26789 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26795 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26797 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26798 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26803 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26805 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26806 your working field in a database.
26807 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26808 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26809 list for that document.
26810 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26814 \begin_layout Standard
26815 The database is a text file with the file extension
26816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26827 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26828 The format is explained in
26829 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26835 and in the LaTeX books (
26836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26838 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26843 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26844 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26845 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26846 \begin_inset Flex URL
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26851 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26859 \begin_layout Standard
26860 To use a database, use the menu
26862 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26867 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26880 \begin_inset space ~
26886 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26887 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
26894 Add bibliography to TOC
26896 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26901 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26902 in the document or just the cited references.
26905 \begin_layout Standard
26906 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26918 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26919 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26920 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26922 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26928 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26929 \begin_inset Newline newline
26933 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26935 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26947 \begin_layout Standard
26948 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26951 \begin_layout Standard
26952 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26953 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
26959 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26960 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26965 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26966 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26967 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26982 The following variants are possible:
26985 \begin_layout Description
26986 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
26987 with other bibliography packages (e.
26988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26992 \begin_inset space \space{}
26999 ), only with the package
27003 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27007 \begin_layout Description
27008 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27009 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27010 with all bibliography packages, except
27015 \begin_layout Description
27016 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27021 , works with all bibliography packages
27024 \begin_layout Standard
27025 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27027 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27033 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27042 \begin_layout Standard
27043 When you select the option
27045 Sectioned bibliography
27049 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27050 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27053 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27054 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27056 Customizing Bibliographies
27064 Additional Features
27069 \begin_layout Standard
27070 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27071 the two methods of creating them.
27072 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27073 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27074 We used the style file
27078 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27081 \begin_layout Subsection
27082 Bibliography layout
27083 \begin_inset Index idx
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27087 Bibliography ! Layout
27095 \begin_layout Standard
27096 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27097 For this feature you need to enable the option
27103 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27107 \begin_inset Index idx
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27111 Document ! Settings
27121 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27122 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27123 in the previous section.
27126 \begin_layout Standard
27127 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27128 the citation reference window.
27129 Here is an example where the text
27130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27134 \begin_inset space ~
27138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27141 appears after the reference:
27144 \begin_layout Standard
27146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27149 key "latexcompanion"
27156 \begin_layout Section
27158 \begin_inset Index idx
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27177 \begin_layout Standard
27178 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27180 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27182 \begin_inset space ~
27187 or the toolbar button
27194 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27195 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27196 by LyX as the index entry.
27199 \begin_layout Standard
27200 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27202 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27203 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27205 \begin_inset space ~
27211 A light blue box labeled
27212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27223 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27224 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27227 \begin_layout Standard
27228 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27229 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27231 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27233 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27240 \begin_layout Subsection
27241 Grouping Index Entries
27242 \begin_inset Index idx
27245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27254 \begin_layout Standard
27255 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27257 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27258 lists under the entry
27259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27267 First we create the entry
27268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27276 \begin_inset space ~
27280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27282 reference "sub:Lists"
27287 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27288 \begin_inset space ~
27292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27294 reference "sec:Itemize"
27298 , we insert the command
27301 \begin_layout Standard
27307 \begin_layout Standard
27311 \begin_layout Standard
27317 \begin_layout Standard
27318 for the enumerated list in section
27319 \begin_inset space ~
27323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27325 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27332 \begin_layout Standard
27333 The exclamation mark
27334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27341 marks the grouping levels.
27342 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27343 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27344 If we don't have an index entry for
27345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27352 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27355 \begin_layout Subsection
27357 \begin_inset Index idx
27360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27361 Index ! Page ranges
27369 \begin_layout Standard
27370 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27372 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27373 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27374 an index entry in section
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27381 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27388 \begin_layout Standard
27391 Paragraph environments|(
27394 \begin_layout Standard
27395 and another entry at the end of section
27396 \begin_inset space ~
27400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27402 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27412 Paragraph environments|)
27415 \begin_layout Standard
27417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27440 respectively start and end the index range.
27441 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27442 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27443 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27444 An example is the index entry
27445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27448 Document ! Settings
27449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27455 \begin_layout Subsection
27457 \begin_inset Index idx
27460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27461 Index ! Cross referencing
27469 \begin_layout Standard
27470 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27471 We referred for example in the index entry
27472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27480 \begin_inset space ~
27484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27486 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27490 ) to the index entry
27491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27498 in the same section using the entry
27501 \begin_layout Standard
27504 GIF|see{Image formats}
27507 \begin_layout Standard
27508 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27509 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27510 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27513 \begin_layout Subsection
27515 \begin_inset Index idx
27518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27519 Index ! Entry order
27527 \begin_layout Standard
27528 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27529 follow the rules for the index order.
27530 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27535 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27537 \begin_inset space ~
27541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27543 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27552 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27553 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27578 \begin_inset Index idx
27581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27582 Dummy entries ! maïs
27588 \begin_inset Index idx
27591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27592 Dummy entries ! maître
27598 \begin_inset Index idx
27601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27602 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27607 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27608 maïs, maison, maître.
27609 To achieve this, we use the command
27612 \begin_layout Standard
27615 previous entry@current entry
27618 \begin_layout Standard
27619 In our case we want to have
27620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27635 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27638 \begin_layout Standard
27644 \begin_layout Standard
27645 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27646 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27647 See the next subsection for an example.
27650 \begin_layout Standard
27651 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27657 \begin_layout Standard
27658 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27663 to generate the index (see sec.
27664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27670 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27679 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27687 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27691 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27692 index commands start with
27693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27705 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27710 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27725 \begin_layout Standard
27737 \begin_layout Subsection
27739 \begin_inset Index idx
27742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 Index ! Entry layout
27751 \begin_layout Standard
27752 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27753 \begin_inset Index idx
27756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27759 This is an italic dummy entry
27764 You can also format the page number using the character
27765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27772 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27773 We can write for example
27776 \begin_layout Standard
27779 italic page number:|textit
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 to get the page number in italic.
27784 \begin_inset Index idx
27787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27788 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27793 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27811 \begin_inset space ~
27817 Have a look at section
27818 \begin_inset space ~
27822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27824 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27828 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27831 \begin_layout Standard
27832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27840 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27844 to generate the index, see sec.
27845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27851 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27860 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27865 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27866 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27869 key "latexcompanion"
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27882 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27884 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27885 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27886 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27887 If so, put the following in the preamble
27890 \begin_layout Standard
27902 \begin_layout Standard
27906 \begin_layout Standard
27912 \begin_layout Standard
27913 in the index entry.
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27923 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27924 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27925 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27929 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27930 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
27931 a bold font for all index entries.
27932 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27944 documentation for details,
27945 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27947 key "makeindex,xindy"
27954 \begin_layout Subsection
27956 \begin_inset Index idx
27959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27968 name "sub:Index-Program"
27975 \begin_layout Standard
27976 If the index generation program
27980 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27984 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27993 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27994 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27995 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27996 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27997 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28007 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28008 dialog, see section
28009 \begin_inset space ~
28013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28015 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28020 The available options are listed and explained in
28021 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28023 key "makeindex,xindy"
28028 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28032 \begin_layout Standard
28033 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28034 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28037 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28038 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28042 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28043 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28046 \begin_layout Subsection
28050 \begin_layout Standard
28051 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28052 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28060 next to the standard index.
28061 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28062 that add this feature.
28068 \begin_inset Index idx
28071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28072 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28077 package to generate multiple indexes.
28078 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28083 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28091 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28092 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28093 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28101 \begin_layout Standard
28102 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28104 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28105 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28108 and select the option
28110 Use multiple Indexes
28117 already contains the standard index
28118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28126 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28127 also appear as a heading) to the
28131 input field and press the
28136 The new index now also appears in the list.
28137 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28141 \begin_layout Standard
28142 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28145 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28152 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28153 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28154 are additional features:
28157 \begin_layout Itemize
28158 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28159 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28162 \begin_layout Itemize
28163 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28164 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28172 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28173 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28174 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28175 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28178 \begin_layout Section
28179 Nomenclature/Glossary
28180 \begin_inset Index idx
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28190 \begin_inset Index idx
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28224 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28231 \begin_layout Standard
28232 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28233 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28234 called nomenclature or glossary.
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28238 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28244 \begin_inset Index idx
28247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28248 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28254 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28255 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28261 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28264 \begin_layout Standard
28265 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28266 and then use the menu
28268 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28274 \begin_inset space ~
28279 or the toolbar button
28282 arg "nomencl-insert"
28287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28298 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28301 \begin_layout Standard
28302 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28303 The first is the term or
28307 that you wish to define.
28312 of the term or symbol.
28315 \begin_layout Standard
28316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28324 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28332 \begin_layout Subsection
28333 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28334 \begin_inset Index idx
28337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28338 Nomenclature ! Layout
28346 \begin_layout Standard
28347 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28351 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28357 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28365 \begin_inset Newline newline
28373 \begin_inset Newline newline
28379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28386 character starts/ends the formula.
28387 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28399 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28411 \begin_inset space ~
28415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28417 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28424 \begin_layout Standard
28428 \begin_inset space ~
28433 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28434 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28439 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28446 in this document is:
28447 \begin_inset Newline newline
28452 dummy entry for the character
28457 \begin_inset Newline newline
28469 \begin_inset space ~
28479 font use the command
28508 \begin_layout Standard
28509 If the characters |
28510 \begin_inset space \space{}
28514 \begin_inset space \space{}
28518 \begin_inset space \space{}
28522 \begin_inset space \space{}
28526 \begin_inset space \space{}
28529 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28530 a quote character in front of them.
28531 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28532 LatexCommand nomenclature
28533 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28534 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28541 \begin_layout Subsection
28542 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28543 \begin_inset Index idx
28546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28547 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28555 \begin_layout Standard
28556 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28557 the symbol definition.
28558 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28560 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28563 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28564 LatexCommand nomenclature
28566 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28573 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28578 LatexCommand nomenclature
28581 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28586 They will be sorted by
28587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28613 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28616 will be sorted before the
28620 since the character
28621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28628 is considered in sorting.
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28632 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28635 \begin_inset space ~
28640 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28641 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28643 For the example given, you can insert
28647 in this field for the
28648 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28655 will be located before
28656 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28662 \begin_layout Standard
28663 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28677 \begin_layout Subsection
28678 Nomenclature Options
28679 \begin_inset Index idx
28682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28683 Nomenclature ! Options
28691 \begin_layout Standard
28696 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28697 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
28700 \begin_layout Description
28701 refeq Appends the phrase
28702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28717 to every nomenclature entry, where
28723 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28726 \begin_layout Description
28727 refpage Appends the phrase
28728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28743 to every nomenclature entry, where
28749 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28752 \begin_layout Description
28753 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28756 \begin_layout Standard
28757 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28758 class options list in the
28760 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28764 In this document the options
28771 \begin_layout Standard
28772 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28778 \begin_layout Standard
28779 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28780 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28785 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28788 \begin_layout Description
28798 \begin_layout Description
28801 nomrefpage Like the
28808 \begin_layout Description
28811 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28820 \begin_layout Description
28824 \begin_inset space ~
28830 \begin_inset space ~
28835 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28838 \begin_layout Standard
28840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28847 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28848 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28851 \begin_layout Standard
28859 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28862 \begin_inset Newline newline
28869 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28874 \begin_inset Newline newline
28878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28893 by their translation.
28896 \begin_layout Subsection
28897 Printing the Nomenclature
28898 \begin_inset Index idx
28901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28902 Nomenclature ! Printing
28910 \begin_layout Standard
28911 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28913 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28914 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28930 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28931 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28932 You can choose between these settings:
28935 \begin_layout Description
28936 Default a space of 1
28937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28943 \begin_layout Description
28945 \begin_inset space ~
28949 \begin_inset space ~
28952 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28955 \begin_layout Description
28956 Custom custom space
28959 \begin_layout Standard
28960 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28969 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28977 For example, in order to change the name to
28981 , add the following line to the preamble:
28984 \begin_layout Standard
28992 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28995 \begin_layout Subsection
28996 Nomenclature Program
28997 \begin_inset Index idx
29000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29001 Nomenclature ! Program
29007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29009 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 LyX uses the program
29021 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29022 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29027 by adding options, see section
29028 \begin_inset space ~
29032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29034 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29039 The available options are listed and explained in
29040 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29042 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29049 \begin_layout Section
29051 \begin_inset Index idx
29054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29061 \begin_inset Index idx
29064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29065 Document ! Branches
29071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29073 name "sec:Branches"
29080 \begin_layout Standard
29081 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29082 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29083 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29084 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29087 \begin_layout Standard
29088 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29089 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29090 To create a branch, either select the menu
29092 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29093 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29096 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29098 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29105 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29106 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29107 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29108 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29109 (see below for an example).
29110 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29111 to the name of the other) and to add
29112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29124 \begin_inset space ~
29127 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29128 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29131 \begin_layout Standard
29132 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29133 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29135 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29138 where you can choose a branch.
29139 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29143 \begin_layout Standard
29144 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29145 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29148 \begin_layout Standard
29149 \begin_inset Branch Question
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29153 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29161 \begin_layout Standard
29162 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29165 \begin_layout Standard
29166 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29174 \begin_layout Standard
29181 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29182 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29185 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29186 Consider for example a file
29187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29194 which has the above branches.
29196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29203 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29227 branch were inactive,
29228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29243 branch was active, likewise
29244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29259 branch was active, and
29260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29263 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29267 if both branches were active.
29268 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29271 \begin_layout Standard
29272 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29278 \begin_layout Standard
29279 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29280 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29282 For example you can define for the question branch
29286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29287 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29288 \begin_inset space ~
29292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29294 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29306 \begin_layout Standard
29316 \begin_layout Standard
29326 \begin_layout Standard
29327 and for the answer branch
29330 \begin_layout Standard
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29350 \begin_layout Standard
29351 \begin_inset Branch Question
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29386 \begin_layout Standard
29387 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29422 \begin_layout Standard
29423 Now it is possible to use the
29427 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29434 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29437 commands to obtain conditional output.
29438 Here is an example formula where only the
29445 \begin_inset Formula
29447 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29455 \begin_layout Standard
29456 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29464 \begin_layout Standard
29465 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29471 \begin_inset space \space{}
29474 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29475 For this advanced usage, see the
29480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29483 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29490 \begin_layout Section
29492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29494 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29499 \begin_inset Index idx
29502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29514 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29515 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29518 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29520 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29525 \begin_inset Index idx
29528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29534 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29535 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29536 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29537 part of the document.
29541 \begin_layout Standard
29542 The header information in the dialog tab
29546 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29547 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29548 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29549 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29553 \begin_inset space ~
29557 \begin_inset space ~
29562 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29563 title and author entries.
29567 \begin_inset space ~
29571 \begin_inset space ~
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29580 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29583 \begin_layout Standard
29584 You can specify in the dialog tab
29588 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29593 \begin_inset space ~
29597 \begin_inset space ~
29601 \begin_inset space ~
29606 option allows long links to be split;
29609 \begin_inset space ~
29613 \begin_inset space ~
29617 \begin_inset space ~
29625 \begin_inset space ~
29630 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29633 \begin_inset space ~
29638 colors the different links.
29639 The default colors are:
29642 \begin_layout Labeling
29643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29648 for hyperlinks and URLs
29651 \begin_layout Labeling
29652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29660 \begin_layout Labeling
29661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
29669 \begin_layout Standard
29670 but you can change these in the field
29675 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
29678 \begin_layout Standard
29681 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29689 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
29690 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
29691 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
29694 \begin_layout Standard
29699 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
29700 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29701 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29711 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
29712 when opening the PDF.
29714 \begin_inset space ~
29717 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29718 \begin_inset space ~
29721 1 will only display the sections.
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29725 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29726 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29732 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29733 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29742 \begin_layout Section
29743 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29746 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29753 \begin_layout Subsection
29755 \begin_inset Index idx
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29767 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29774 \begin_layout Standard
29775 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29776 constructs, but not all.
29777 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29778 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29779 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29780 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
29781 and their commands.
29784 \begin_layout Standard
29785 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29787 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29789 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29802 \begin_inset space ~
29807 or by the toolbar button
29820 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29828 \begin_layout Standard
29829 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29830 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29831 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29832 using the LaTeX-command
29838 , you can write the command part
29844 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29848 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29849 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29850 the following example:
29853 \begin_layout Standard
29854 \begin_inset Graphics
29855 filename clipart/ERT.png
29863 \begin_layout Standard
29867 \begin_layout Standard
29868 This is a line with a
29872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29895 \begin_layout Standard
29896 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29904 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29905 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29913 \begin_layout Subsection
29914 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29915 \begin_inset Argument 1
29918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29925 \begin_inset Index idx
29928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29937 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29944 \begin_layout Standard
29945 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29946 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29947 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29956 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29957 any time if you know the right commands.
29958 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
29959 is the end of the day.
29960 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29961 all caption labels bold.
29962 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29964 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29968 \begin_layout Standard
29969 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29970 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29971 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
29973 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29983 As result you find that the package
29988 \begin_inset Index idx
29991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29992 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29998 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30000 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30003 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30026 \begin_layout Standard
30031 usepackage[options]{package name}
30034 \begin_layout Standard
30035 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30036 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30037 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30041 In your case the package name is
30046 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30051 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30052 So you add the command
30055 \begin_layout Standard
30060 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30063 \begin_layout Standard
30064 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30069 For more commands provided by the
30073 package, have a look at its documentation,
30074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30088 \begin_layout Standard
30089 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30091 For example if you use a
30095 class, you don't need the package
30099 , you can instead write
30102 \begin_layout Standard
30107 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30112 \begin_layout Standard
30113 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30114 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30115 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30122 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30127 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30129 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30130 the previous section.
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30134 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30136 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30138 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30152 \begin_layout Standard
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30166 \begin_inset Note Note
30169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30170 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30178 \begin_layout Left Header
30179 \begin_inset Argument 1
30182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30202 \begin_inset Note Note
30205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30206 defines the header line as described below
30214 \begin_layout Center Header
30215 \begin_inset Argument 1
30218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30227 \begin_layout Right Header
30228 \begin_inset Argument 1
30231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 \begin_layout Left Footer
30253 \begin_inset Argument 1
30256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30277 \begin_layout Center Footer
30278 \begin_inset Argument 1
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30292 \begin_inset Newline newline
30296 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30302 \begin_layout Right Footer
30303 \begin_inset Argument 1
30306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30328 \begin_layout Section
30329 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30332 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30337 \begin_inset Index idx
30340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30341 Document ! Header/Footer line
30347 \begin_inset Index idx
30350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30359 \begin_layout Standard
30360 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30364 \begin_inset space ~
30375 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30381 \begin_inset space ~
30387 As a second step add in the menu
30389 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30390 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30397 Custom Header/Footerlines
30398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30402 This module offers the following 6
30403 \begin_inset space ~
30409 \begin_layout Description
30411 \begin_inset space ~
30415 \begin_inset space ~
30419 \begin_inset space ~
30423 \begin_inset space ~
30427 \begin_inset space ~
30433 \begin_layout Description
30435 \begin_inset space ~
30439 \begin_inset space ~
30443 \begin_inset space ~
30447 \begin_inset space ~
30451 \begin_inset space ~
30457 \begin_layout Standard
30458 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30463 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30465 \begin_inset space ~
30469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30471 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30475 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30479 \begin_inset Float figure
30485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30488 \begin_inset Tabular
30489 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30490 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30491 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30492 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30493 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30495 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30513 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30542 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30553 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30557 The normal text on the page goes here.
30558 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30560 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30561 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30566 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30604 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30651 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30656 name "fig:Page-layout"
30660 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30673 \begin_layout Standard
30674 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30682 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
30686 \begin_inset space ~
30691 is set to “Default”.
30692 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
30701 \begin_layout Subsection
30705 \begin_layout Standard
30706 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
30707 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
30708 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
30709 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30711 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30712 Defining the footer line works similarly.
30715 \begin_layout Standard
30716 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30732 \begin_inset space ~
30740 \begin_layout Description
30743 thepage prints the current page number
30746 \begin_layout Description
30749 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30752 \begin_layout Description
30755 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30758 \begin_layout Description
30761 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30762 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30769 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30772 because it usually goes in a left header.
30775 \begin_layout Description
30778 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30779 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30781 It is normally used in the right header.
30784 \begin_layout Subsection
30785 Default header/footer
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30789 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30790 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30791 footer has the page number.
30792 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30793 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30794 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30805 \begin_layout Subsection
30809 \begin_layout Standard
30810 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30811 Some pages are different.
30812 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30813 a new part or chapter in your book.
30814 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30815 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30816 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30820 Header and footer decoration line
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30824 By default, you get a 0.4
30825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30828 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30829 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30841 in the following way:
30844 \begin_layout Standard
30851 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30855 where thickness is a size in standard units like
30864 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30871 \begin_layout Standard
30872 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30873 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30874 \begin_inset space ~
30878 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30888 Several header/footer lines
30891 \begin_layout Standard
30892 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30893 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30894 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30896 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30910 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30911 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30924 \begin_inset space ~
30932 \begin_layout Standard
30939 headheight}{height}
30942 \begin_layout Standard
30943 where height is a size in standard units.
30944 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30945 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
30946 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
30948 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30965 \begin_inset space ~
30970 to see if you can find a warning about the package
30975 \begin_inset Index idx
30978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30985 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30986 for your header/footer.
30989 \begin_layout Subsection
30993 \begin_layout Standard
30994 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30995 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30996 This example consists of the following definition:
30999 \begin_layout Description
31001 \begin_inset space ~
31010 , empty optional argument
31013 \begin_layout Description
31015 \begin_inset space ~
31018 Header empty, empty optional argument
31021 \begin_layout Description
31023 \begin_inset space ~
31032 in the optional argument
31035 \begin_layout Description
31037 \begin_inset space ~
31046 in the optional argument
31049 \begin_layout Description
31051 \begin_inset space ~
31063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31067 \begin_inset Newline newline
31071 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31078 in the optional argument
31081 \begin_layout Description
31083 \begin_inset space ~
31092 , empty optional argument
31095 \begin_layout Description
31098 headrulewidth set to 2
31099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31105 \begin_layout Standard
31106 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31107 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31113 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31129 \begin_layout Standard
31133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31137 pagestyle{headings}
31143 \begin_inset Note Note
31146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31147 switches back to page style with the default headings
31155 \begin_layout Section
31156 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31159 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31164 \begin_inset Index idx
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31174 \begin_inset Index idx
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 \begin_layout Standard
31187 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31188 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31189 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31192 \begin_layout Subsection
31196 \begin_layout Standard
31197 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31202 \begin_inset Index idx
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31206 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31211 (on some systems named simply
31216 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31218 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31224 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31225 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31233 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31234 automatically installed together with LyX.
31237 \begin_layout Subsection
31241 \begin_layout Standard
31242 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31243 LaTeX, activate the option
31246 \begin_inset space ~
31253 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31259 \begin_inset space ~
31263 \begin_inset space ~
31266 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31273 \begin_inset space ~
31286 \begin_inset space ~
31291 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31294 \begin_layout Standard
31295 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31299 \begin_inset space ~
31307 \begin_inset space ~
31315 \begin_layout Standard
31316 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31320 \begin_layout Standard
31321 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31329 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31330 generated by activating the option
31333 \begin_inset space ~
31339 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31347 \begin_layout Subsection
31348 Selected document parts
31351 \begin_layout Standard
31352 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31353 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31354 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31355 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31357 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31361 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31362 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31363 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31366 \begin_layout Standard
31367 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31373 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31384 is explained in section
31386 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31391 \begin_inset space ~
31401 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31402 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31404 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31406 Here is the result:
31409 \begin_layout Standard
31410 \begin_inset Preview
31412 \begin_layout Standard
31417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31421 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31427 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31437 height_special "totalheight"
31440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31471 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31493 \begin_layout Standard
31494 Previewing works also for colors.
31495 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 is explained in section
31520 \begin_inset space ~
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31534 \begin_inset Preview
31536 \begin_layout Standard
31540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31559 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31564 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31583 \begin_layout Standard
31584 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31590 \begin_layout Standard
31591 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31592 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31593 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31595 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31596 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31597 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31598 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31602 \begin_layout Subsection
31606 \begin_layout Standard
31607 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31610 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31612 \begin_inset space ~
31617 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31618 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31620 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31621 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31622 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31623 the source view window.
31628 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31629 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31630 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31633 \begin_layout Section
31634 Advanced Find and Replace
31635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31637 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31642 \begin_inset Index idx
31645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31652 \begin_inset Index idx
31655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31664 \begin_layout Subsection
31668 \begin_layout Standard
31669 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31670 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31671 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31672 The key-features are:
31675 \begin_layout Itemize
31676 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31677 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31678 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31682 \begin_layout Itemize
31683 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31684 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31685 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31686 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31689 \begin_layout Itemize
31690 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
31691 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
31692 outside of mathematics environments
31695 \begin_layout Itemize
31696 Search may be widened to a specific
31701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31708 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31709 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31716 \begin_layout Itemize
31717 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31718 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31723 \begin_inset space ~
31726 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31729 \begin_layout Subsection
31733 \begin_layout Standard
31734 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31736 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31749 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31752 ) or the toolbar button
31755 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31761 Advanced Find and Replace
31766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31770 \begin_layout Standard
31775 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31779 \begin_inset space ~
31784 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31787 arg "break-paragraph"
31791 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31792 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31796 arg "break-paragraph"
31799 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
31803 searches backwards.
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31810 \begin_inset space ~
31815 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31824 \begin_inset space ~
31829 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31832 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31833 Searching for mathematics
31836 \begin_layout Standard
31837 Mathematical formulas, such as
31838 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31841 or something more complex like
31842 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31845 , may be searched for by typing them in the
31850 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31851 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31852 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31853 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31859 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31863 \begin_layout Standard
31864 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31865 This is done by switching to the
31869 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31874 This way, entering in the
31881 \begin_layout Itemize
31882 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
31883 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
31886 \begin_layout Itemize
31887 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31888 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
31891 \begin_layout Itemize
31892 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
31893 of it only within section headings.
31894 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31895 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31899 \begin_layout Itemize
31900 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31901 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31908 \begin_layout Standard
31909 The entries made in the
31913 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
31916 \begin_inset space ~
31922 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31926 button or alternatively press
31929 arg "break-paragraph"
31936 while the cursor is in the
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31947 \begin_layout Standard
31948 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
31949 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
31953 \begin_layout Itemize
31954 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31955 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31963 with its typewriter version
31964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31978 \begin_layout Itemize
31979 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31985 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31997 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32004 (you may want to enable the
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32015 \begin_inset space ~
32020 options and disable the
32028 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32036 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32037 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32041 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32044 , or occurrences of
32045 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32049 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32055 \begin_layout Subsection
32059 \begin_layout Standard
32060 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32065 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32067 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32069 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32078 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32084 This is done with the context menu
32086 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32087 Insert Regular Expression
32089 while the cursor is in the
32094 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32095 expression matching rules
32099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32100 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32106 \begin_inset space ~
32109 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32110 to match expressions.
32115 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32116 same text in the document.
32117 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32118 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32121 \begin_layout Enumerate
32122 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32127 editor the fraction
32128 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32132 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32135 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32136 fractions with the given denominator.
32139 \begin_layout Enumerate
32140 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32152 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32157 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32158 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32159 Also, by inserting a
32160 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32163 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32164 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32167 \begin_layout Standard
32168 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32169 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32170 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32173 , and referring back to them through
32174 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32178 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32182 For example, try searching with the regexp
32183 \begin_inset Newline newline
32186 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32189 \begin_inset Newline newline
32192 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32199 \begin_layout Standard
32200 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32208 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32209 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32210 sub-expressions is absolute.
32212 \begin_inset space ~
32216 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32219 always refers to the first occurrence of
32220 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32223 in all entered regexps.
32231 \begin_layout Section
32233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32235 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32240 \begin_inset Index idx
32243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32256 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32263 key or the toolbar button
32266 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32269 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32270 beginning of the currently selected text.
32271 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32272 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32273 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32274 scrolled so that it is visible.
32275 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32276 n, if any could be found.
32277 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32281 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32282 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32289 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32293 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32294 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32295 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32296 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32299 \begin_inset space ~
32307 arg "dialog-show character"
32310 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32311 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32315 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32316 \begin_inset Newline newline
32320 \begin_inset Flex URL
32323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32325 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32331 \begin_inset Newline newline
32335 \begin_inset space ~
32338 files for each language.
32339 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32340 \begin_inset space ~
32343 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32352 \begin_inset Newline newline
32355 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32356 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32357 but in most cases these are
32373 is the language code.
32376 \begin_layout Subsection
32380 \begin_layout Standard
32383 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32384 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32386 \begin_inset space ~
32389 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32392 you can set the following things:
32395 \begin_layout Description
32397 \begin_inset space ~
32400 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32401 Depending on your platform,
32415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32416 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32417 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32432 \begin_layout Description
32434 \begin_inset space ~
32437 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32438 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32441 \begin_layout Description
32443 \begin_inset space ~
32446 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32452 \begin_inset space \space{}
32456 This should normally not be needed.
32459 \begin_layout Description
32461 \begin_inset space ~
32465 \begin_inset space ~
32468 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32480 \begin_layout Description
32482 \begin_inset space ~
32485 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32486 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32487 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32488 appear in a context menu.
32489 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32493 \begin_layout Description
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32499 \begin_inset space ~
32503 \begin_inset space ~
32506 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32510 \begin_layout Section
32512 \begin_inset Index idx
32515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32524 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32533 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32545 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32554 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32555 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32556 which are available for many languages.
32559 \begin_layout Standard
32560 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32564 \begin_layout Subsection
32565 Setting up the thesaurus
32568 \begin_layout Standard
32577 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32581 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32586 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32592 \begin_inset space ~
32600 For instance, the US English files are named:
32603 \begin_layout Itemize
32607 \begin_layout Itemize
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32620 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32621 and you just need to point LyX (in
32623 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32624 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32625 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32627 \begin_inset space ~
32632 ) to the path where they are installed.
32636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32637 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
32638 ies, typical locations are
32644 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
32648 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
32652 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
32655 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
32661 LibreOffice-<Version>
32668 On the Mac, the default location is
32670 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
32671 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32672 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
32673 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
32674 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32675 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
32683 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
32684 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
32685 correct place right away.
32688 \begin_layout Standard
32689 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
32690 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
32694 \begin_layout Itemize
32695 \begin_inset Flex URL
32698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32700 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
32708 \begin_layout Standard
32709 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
32710 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
32712 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32713 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32714 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32716 \begin_inset space ~
32722 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
32723 and point LyX there.
32726 \begin_layout Standard
32727 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
32729 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
32732 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
32738 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
32741 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
32743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32749 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32750 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32751 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32753 \begin_inset space ~
32758 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
32761 \begin_layout Subsection
32762 Using the thesaurus
32765 \begin_layout Standard
32766 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32768 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32771 or the toolbar button
32774 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32777 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32779 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32781 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
32782 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32783 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32792 ), related terms (such as
32795 \begin_inset space ~
32804 ), compounds (such as
32807 \begin_inset space ~
32816 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32825 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32828 \begin_layout Standard
32829 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32830 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32835 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32836 the dictionary, such as the above
32840 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32845 \begin_inset space \space{}
32848 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32849 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32850 For example, looking up the word form
32854 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32859 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
32860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32864 \begin_inset space \space{}
32875 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
32876 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
32877 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
32880 \begin_layout Section
32882 \begin_inset Index idx
32885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32892 \begin_inset Index idx
32895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32896 Document ! Change Tracking
32902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32904 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32911 \begin_layout Standard
32912 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32913 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32914 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32915 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32917 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32919 \begin_inset space ~
32922 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32924 \begin_inset space ~
32932 \begin_layout Standard
32933 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32947 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32948 You can change the color in
32950 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32951 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32953 \begin_inset space ~
32957 \begin_inset space ~
32962 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
32968 \begin_inset Index idx
32971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32972 Color ! Change tracking
32977 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32978 the cursor is in changed text.
32979 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32982 arg "changes-merge"
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32989 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32990 \begin_inset Index idx
32993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33002 \begin_layout Standard
33003 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33009 \begin_layout Standard
33010 \begin_inset Graphics
33011 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33019 \begin_layout Standard
33020 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33027 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33030 \begin_layout Standard
33031 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33037 \begin_layout Standard
33038 \begin_inset Tabular
33039 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33040 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33041 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33042 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 arg "changes-track"
33060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33066 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33071 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33073 \begin_inset space ~
33082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33091 arg "changes-output"
33099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33105 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33107 \begin_inset space ~
33110 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33112 \begin_inset space ~
33116 \begin_inset space ~
33120 \begin_inset space ~
33129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 Jumps to the next change
33156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 arg "change-accept"
33173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33179 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33181 \begin_inset space ~
33184 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33186 \begin_inset space ~
33195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33204 arg "change-reject"
33212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33218 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33220 \begin_inset space ~
33223 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33225 \begin_inset space ~
33234 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33243 arg "changes-merge"
33251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33257 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33259 \begin_inset space ~
33262 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33264 \begin_inset space ~
33273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33282 arg "all-changes-accept"
33290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33296 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33298 \begin_inset space ~
33301 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33303 \begin_inset space ~
33307 \begin_inset space ~
33316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33325 arg "all-changes-reject"
33333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33339 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33341 \begin_inset space ~
33344 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33346 \begin_inset space ~
33350 \begin_inset space ~
33359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33382 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33383 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33396 \begin_inset space ~
33405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33428 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33430 \begin_inset space ~
33446 \begin_layout Standard
33447 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33453 \begin_layout Standard
33454 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33475 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33476 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33477 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33478 the next change after the current cursor position.
33479 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33480 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33481 step to the next change.
33482 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33485 \begin_layout Standard
33486 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33487 to describe a change.
33490 \begin_layout Standard
33491 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33496 \begin_inset Index idx
33499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33500 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33506 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33513 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33516 \begin_layout Section
33517 Comparison of Documents
33518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33520 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33525 \begin_inset Index idx
33528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33529 Comparison of documents
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33540 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33544 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33546 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33547 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33551 \begin_inset space ~
33555 \begin_inset space ~
33559 \begin_inset space ~
33568 \begin_inset space ~
33572 \begin_inset space ~
33576 \begin_inset space ~
33580 \begin_inset space ~
33584 \begin_inset space ~
33588 \begin_inset space ~
33593 enables the change tracking option
33596 \begin_inset space ~
33600 \begin_inset space ~
33604 \begin_inset space ~
33609 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33612 \begin_layout Section
33613 International Support
33614 \begin_inset Index idx
33617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33618 International support
33626 \begin_layout Standard
33627 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33628 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33629 up LyX to use them:
33630 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33632 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33639 \begin_layout Standard
33640 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33641 \begin_inset space ~
33645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33647 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33654 \begin_layout Subsection
33656 \begin_inset Index idx
33659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 \begin_inset Index idx
33669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33670 Document ! Settings
33676 \begin_inset Index idx
33679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33680 Document ! Language
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33691 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33692 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33695 dialog lets you set
33697 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33702 \begin_layout Standard
33707 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33711 \begin_inset space ~
33716 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33717 For details about the different encoding options see section
33718 \begin_inset space ~
33722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33724 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33731 \begin_layout Subsection
33732 Keyboard mapping configuration
33733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33735 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33742 \begin_layout Standard
33743 If you have for example a U.
33744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33747 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33748 can use an alternate keymap.
33749 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33750 use an Italian keymap.
33753 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33754 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33755 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33758 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33759 \begin_inset space ~
33763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33765 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33770 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33771 which one you want to use.
33774 \begin_layout Standard
33775 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33776 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33777 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33781 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33782 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33783 one to support the characters you want.
33784 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33791 \begin_layout Chapter
33794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33796 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33803 \begin_layout Standard
33804 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33805 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33806 topic inside the user's guide.
33809 \begin_layout Section
33811 \begin_inset Index idx
33814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33823 \begin_layout Standard
33828 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33831 \begin_layout Subsection
33835 \begin_layout Standard
33836 Creates a new document.
33839 \begin_layout Subsection
33843 \begin_layout Standard
33844 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33845 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33846 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33849 \begin_layout Subsection
33853 \begin_layout Standard
33857 \begin_layout Subsection
33861 \begin_layout Standard
33862 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33863 Click there on a file to open it.
33866 \begin_layout Subsection
33870 \begin_layout Standard
33871 Closes the current document.
33874 \begin_layout Subsection
33878 \begin_layout Standard
33879 Closes all opened documents.
33882 \begin_layout Subsection
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33887 Saves the actual document.
33890 \begin_layout Subsection
33894 \begin_layout Standard
33895 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33898 \begin_layout Subsection
33902 \begin_layout Standard
33903 Saves all opened documents.
33906 \begin_layout Subsection
33910 \begin_layout Standard
33911 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33914 \begin_layout Subsection
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33919 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33920 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33921 It is described in the section
33923 Version Control in LyX
33927 Additional Features
33932 \begin_layout Subsection
33936 \begin_layout Standard
33937 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33938 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33940 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33944 When using the menu entry
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33952 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33956 \begin_inset space ~
33960 \begin_inset space ~
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33969 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33970 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33973 \begin_layout Subsection
33975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33984 \begin_layout Standard
33985 You can export your document to various file formats.
33986 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33987 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33988 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33992 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33994 \begin_inset space ~
33998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34000 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34007 \begin_layout Description
34013 \begin_inset space ~
34020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 yX format of the special LyX
34028 \begin_inset space ~
34031 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34032 \begin_inset Newline newline
34035 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34038 \begin_layout Description
34039 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34045 \begin_layout Description
34047 \begin_inset space ~
34050 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34056 \begin_layout Description
34057 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34058 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34059 files paths or file names in your document.
34060 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34067 \begin_layout Description
34068 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34069 in files paths or file names
34072 \begin_layout Description
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34088 eX) DVI-format using the program
34092 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34095 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34103 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34111 \begin_layout Description
34113 \begin_inset space ~
34116 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34120 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34125 \begin_layout Description
34126 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34130 \begin_layout Description
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34136 \begin_inset space ~
34139 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34143 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34151 \begin_layout Description
34158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34166 \begin_inset space ~
34177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34190 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34195 \begin_layout Description
34202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34210 \begin_inset space ~
34215 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34216 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34220 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34223 \begin_layout Description
34230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34238 \begin_inset space ~
34243 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34244 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34252 \begin_layout Description
34259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34267 \begin_inset space ~
34278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34291 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34296 \begin_layout Description
34298 \begin_inset space ~
34302 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34320 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34321 music notation software
34326 \begin_layout Description
34333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34343 \begin_inset space ~
34347 \begin_inset space ~
34350 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34351 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34352 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34355 \begin_layout Description
34362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 \begin_inset space ~
34375 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34391 represent the version number)
34394 \begin_layout Description
34401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34410 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34413 \begin_layout Description
34414 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34419 \begin_layout Description
34420 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34422 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34425 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34429 \begin_layout Description
34433 \begin_inset space ~
34438 PDF-format using the program
34442 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34445 \begin_layout Description
34449 \begin_inset space ~
34456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 PDF-format using the program
34469 , produces PDF-files directly
34472 \begin_layout Description
34476 \begin_inset space ~
34481 PDF-format using the program
34485 , produces PDF-files directly
34488 \begin_layout Description
34492 \begin_inset space ~
34497 PDF-format using the program
34501 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34504 \begin_layout Description
34508 \begin_inset space ~
34515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 PDF-format using the program
34528 , produces PDF-files directly
34531 \begin_layout Description
34535 \begin_inset space ~
34543 \begin_layout Description
34547 \begin_inset space ~
34551 \begin_inset space ~
34556 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34557 and then exported as text using the program
34562 \begin_layout Description
34567 PostScript format using the program
34572 \begin_layout Description
34573 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34574 programming language
34587 it is possible to use
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 If one of the menu entries
34602 \begin_inset space ~
34611 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34612 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34613 \begin_inset space ~
34617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34619 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34624 \begin_inset Index idx
34627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34628 Reconfiguration of LyX
34636 \begin_layout Subsection
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34642 format or send it to a printer.
34643 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34644 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34650 For more information have a look at section
34651 \begin_inset space ~
34655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34657 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34664 \begin_layout Subsection
34668 \begin_layout Standard
34669 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34670 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34671 prefix, see section
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34678 reference "sec:Paths"
34683 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34692 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34693 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34700 reference "sub:Converters"
34707 \begin_layout Subsection
34708 New and Close Window
34711 \begin_layout Standard
34712 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34715 \begin_layout Subsection
34719 \begin_layout Standard
34720 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34723 \begin_layout Section
34725 \begin_inset Index idx
34728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34737 \begin_layout Subsection
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34742 Described in section
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34749 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34756 \begin_layout Subsection
34757 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34760 \begin_layout Standard
34761 Described in section
34762 \begin_inset space ~
34766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34768 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34775 \begin_layout Subsection
34779 \begin_layout Standard
34780 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
34781 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34784 \begin_layout Subsection
34788 \begin_layout Standard
34789 Selects the whole document.
34792 \begin_layout Subsection
34793 Find & Replace (Quick)
34796 \begin_layout Standard
34797 Described in section
34798 \begin_inset space ~
34802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34804 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34811 \begin_layout Subsection
34812 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 Described in section
34817 \begin_inset space ~
34821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34823 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34830 \begin_layout Subsection
34831 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
34839 \begin_layout Subsection
34843 \begin_layout Standard
34844 Described in section
34845 \begin_inset space ~
34849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34851 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34858 \begin_layout Subsection
34860 \begin_inset Index idx
34863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34864 Paragraph ! Settings
34872 \begin_layout Standard
34873 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34874 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34878 \begin_layout Standard
34879 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34880 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
34886 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34887 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34897 \begin_layout Subsection
34901 \begin_layout Standard
34902 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
34903 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
34904 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
34908 \begin_layout Standard
34909 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34911 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34912 The properties of tables are described in section
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34919 reference "sec:Tables"
34923 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34930 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34937 \begin_layout Subsection
34938 Increase/Decrease List Depth
34941 \begin_layout Standard
34942 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34944 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34945 \begin_inset space ~
34949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34951 reference "sec:Nesting"
34956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34958 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34965 \begin_layout Section
34967 \begin_inset Index idx
34970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34979 \begin_layout Standard
34980 At the bottom of the
34984 menu the opened documents are listed.
34987 \begin_layout Subsection
34988 Open/Close all Insets
34991 \begin_layout Standard
34992 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34995 \begin_layout Subsection
34996 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34999 \begin_layout Standard
35000 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35003 \begin_layout Standard
35004 Math macros are described in the
35011 \begin_layout Subsection
35015 \begin_layout Standard
35016 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35017 \begin_inset space ~
35021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35023 reference "sec:Navigating"
35028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35030 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35037 \begin_layout Subsection
35041 \begin_layout Standard
35042 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35050 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35057 \begin_layout Subsection
35061 \begin_layout Standard
35062 Opens a window showing console messages.
35063 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35067 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35068 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35071 \begin_layout Subsection
35073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35075 name "sub:Toolbars"
35080 \begin_inset Index idx
35083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35092 \begin_layout Standard
35093 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35094 All toolbars and the
35097 \begin_inset space ~
35102 can be turned on and off.
35107 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35131 \begin_inset space ~
35136 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35140 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35152 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35156 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35157 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35158 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35159 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35160 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35163 \begin_layout Standard
35164 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35165 \begin_inset space ~
35169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35171 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35178 \begin_layout Subsection
35182 \begin_layout Standard
35186 \begin_inset space ~
35190 \begin_inset space ~
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35198 \begin_inset space ~
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35206 \begin_inset space ~
35211 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35218 \begin_inset space ~
35222 \begin_inset space ~
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35230 \begin_inset space ~
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35239 will split it horizontally.
35240 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35241 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35242 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35243 three or more documents at the same time.
35244 To close a split view, use the menu
35247 \begin_inset space ~
35251 \begin_inset space ~
35259 \begin_layout Subsection
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35264 Closes a split view.
35267 \begin_layout Subsection
35271 \begin_layout Standard
35272 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35273 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35274 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35275 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35276 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35279 \begin_layout Section
35281 \begin_inset Index idx
35284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35293 \begin_layout Subsection
35297 \begin_layout Standard
35298 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35299 \begin_inset space ~
35303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35305 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35316 \begin_layout Subsection
35318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35320 name "sub:Special-Character"
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 Here you can insert the following characters:
35331 \begin_layout Description
35336 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35338 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35339 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35340 You can get a complete display by checking
35343 \begin_inset space ~
35349 \begin_inset Newline newline
35353 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35361 Not all characters will be visible in the
35365 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35373 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35377 ) can display every character.
35385 \begin_layout Description
35386 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35390 \begin_layout Description
35392 \begin_inset space ~
35396 \begin_inset space ~
35399 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35400 \begin_inset space ~
35404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35406 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35413 \begin_layout Description
35415 \begin_inset space ~
35418 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35421 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35422 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35428 \begin_layout Description
35430 \begin_inset space ~
35433 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35436 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35437 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35443 \begin_layout Description
35445 \begin_inset space ~
35448 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35452 \begin_layout Description
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35457 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35461 \begin_layout Description
35463 \begin_inset space ~
35466 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35472 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35478 \begin_layout Description
35480 \begin_inset space ~
35483 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35487 \begin_layout Description
35489 \begin_inset space ~
35493 \begin_inset Index idx
35496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35503 \begin_inset Index idx
35506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35507 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35512 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35513 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35515 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35520 \begin_inset Index idx
35523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35524 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35530 \begin_inset Newline newline
35533 More information about this feature can be found in the
35539 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35545 \begin_layout Subsection
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35553 \begin_layout Description
35554 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35555 \begin_inset script superscript
35557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35566 \begin_layout Description
35567 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35568 \begin_inset script subscript
35570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35579 \begin_layout Description
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35584 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35585 \begin_inset space ~
35589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35591 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35598 \begin_layout Description
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35603 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35610 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35617 \begin_layout Description
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35622 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
35623 \begin_inset space ~
35627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35629 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35636 \begin_layout Description
35638 \begin_inset space ~
35641 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
35643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35647 \begin_inset space \space{}
35650 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
35651 An example from the LyX
35656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35659 To insert a fraction use the command
35664 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35668 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
35674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35677 The visible space is hereby the character before the
35684 \begin_layout Description
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35689 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
35690 \begin_inset space ~
35694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35696 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35703 \begin_layout Description
35705 \begin_inset space ~
35708 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35715 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35722 \begin_layout Description
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35727 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35734 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35741 \begin_layout Description
35742 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35749 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35756 \begin_layout Description
35758 \begin_inset space ~
35761 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
35762 \begin_inset space ~
35766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35768 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35775 \begin_layout Description
35777 \begin_inset space ~
35780 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35787 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35794 \begin_layout Description
35796 \begin_inset space ~
35800 \begin_inset space ~
35803 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35810 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35817 \begin_layout Description
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35822 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
35823 as described in section
35824 \begin_inset space ~
35828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35830 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35837 \begin_layout Description
35839 \begin_inset space ~
35842 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35849 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35856 \begin_layout Description
35858 \begin_inset space ~
35861 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
35862 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
35864 \begin_inset space ~
35868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35870 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35877 \begin_layout Description
35879 \begin_inset space ~
35882 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
35883 \begin_inset space ~
35887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35889 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35896 \begin_layout Description
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35905 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
35906 \begin_inset space ~
35910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35912 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35919 \begin_layout Subsection
35923 \begin_layout Standard
35924 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35928 \begin_inset space ~
35945 are described in section
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35952 reference "sec:toc"
35961 is described in section
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35968 reference "sec:Index"
35976 is described in section
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35983 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35989 BibTeX Bibliography
35991 is described in section
35992 \begin_inset space ~
35996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35998 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36005 \begin_layout Subsection
36009 \begin_layout Standard
36010 To insert floats, as described in section
36011 \begin_inset space ~
36015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36017 reference "sec:Floats"
36021 and in detail the chapter
36028 \begin_inset space ~
36036 \begin_layout Subsection
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36041 To insert notes, described in section
36042 \begin_inset space ~
36046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36048 reference "sec:Notes"
36055 \begin_layout Subsection
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36060 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36062 Branches are described in section
36063 \begin_inset space ~
36067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36069 reference "sec:Branches"
36076 \begin_layout Subsection
36080 \begin_layout Standard
36081 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36082 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36084 An example is the document class
36085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36092 with three custom insets.
36095 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36099 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36105 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36108 \begin_layout Subsection
36110 \begin_inset Index idx
36113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36122 \begin_layout Standard
36123 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36125 For more information see chapter
36127 External Document Parts
36130 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_layout Subsection
36138 \begin_inset Index idx
36141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36150 \begin_layout Standard
36151 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36152 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36159 \begin_inset space ~
36167 \begin_layout Subsection
36171 \begin_layout Standard
36176 dialog as described in section
36177 \begin_inset space ~
36181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36183 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36190 \begin_layout Subsection
36194 \begin_layout Standard
36199 as described in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36213 \begin_layout Subsection
36217 \begin_layout Standard
36222 as described in section
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36229 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36236 \begin_layout Subsection
36238 \begin_inset Index idx
36241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36248 \begin_inset Index idx
36251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36252 Longtables ! Caption
36260 \begin_layout Standard
36261 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36262 Floats are described in section
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36269 reference "sec:Floats"
36273 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_layout Subsection
36292 \begin_layout Standard
36293 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36300 reference "sec:Index"
36307 \begin_layout Subsection
36311 \begin_layout Standard
36312 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36313 \begin_inset space ~
36317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36319 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36326 \begin_layout Subsection
36330 \begin_layout Standard
36331 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36332 Tables are described in section
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36339 reference "sec:Tables"
36343 and in detail in the chapter
36350 \begin_inset space ~
36358 \begin_layout Subsection
36362 \begin_layout Standard
36368 Graphics are described in section
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36375 reference "sec:Graphics"
36382 \begin_layout Subsection
36386 \begin_layout Standard
36387 Inserts a URL as described in section
36388 \begin_inset space ~
36392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36394 reference "sub:URLs"
36401 \begin_layout Subsection
36405 \begin_layout Standard
36406 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36407 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36413 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36420 \begin_layout Subsection
36424 \begin_layout Standard
36425 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36432 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36439 \begin_layout Subsection
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36444 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36451 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36464 title or caption of a float.
36465 Inserts a short title as described in section
36466 \begin_inset space ~
36470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36472 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36479 \begin_layout Subsection
36483 \begin_layout Standard
36484 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36491 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36498 \begin_layout Subsection
36500 \begin_inset Index idx
36503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36512 \begin_layout Standard
36513 Inserts a program listings box.
36514 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36516 Program Code Listings
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_layout Subsection
36533 \begin_layout Standard
36534 Inserts the actual date.
36535 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36537 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36545 \begin_inset space ~
36553 \begin_layout Subsection
36557 \begin_layout Standard
36558 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36565 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36572 \begin_layout Section
36574 \begin_inset Index idx
36577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 \begin_layout Standard
36587 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36588 \begin_inset space ~
36591 of the current document.
36592 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36595 \begin_layout Subsection
36599 \begin_layout Standard
36600 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36601 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36602 to jump, for example, between section
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36607 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36608 \begin_inset space ~
36611 2.5 and use the submenu
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36625 \begin_inset space ~
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36635 \begin_inset space ~
36641 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36645 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36651 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36654 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36657 \begin_layout Standard
36658 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36667 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36675 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
36678 \begin_layout Subsection
36679 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36682 \begin_layout Standard
36683 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
36687 \begin_layout Subsection
36691 \begin_layout Standard
36692 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36693 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36694 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36698 \begin_inset space ~
36702 \begin_inset space ~
36710 \begin_layout Subsection
36714 \begin_layout Standard
36715 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
36718 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36720 \begin_inset space ~
36728 \begin_inset space ~
36733 manual for a detailed description.
36736 \begin_layout Section
36738 \begin_inset Index idx
36741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36750 \begin_layout Subsection
36754 \begin_layout Standard
36755 Change Tracking is described in section
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36762 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36769 \begin_layout Subsection
36774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36784 \begin_layout Standard
36785 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36787 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
36788 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
36789 to the clipboard or update the view.
36790 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36793 \begin_layout Subsection
36794 Start Appendix Here
36797 \begin_layout Standard
36798 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
36799 as described in section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "sec:Appendices"
36813 \begin_layout Subsection
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36821 \begin_layout Standard
36822 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
36823 default output format for the document (menu
36825 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36826 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36827 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_inset space ~
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36845 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
36849 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
36851 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36852 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36854 \begin_inset space ~
36857 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36862 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36864 \begin_inset space ~
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36880 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36884 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
36885 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36887 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36888 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36890 \begin_inset space ~
36893 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36895 \begin_inset space ~
36898 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36902 \begin_inset space ~
36906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36908 reference "sec:File-Formats"
36913 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
36914 The default output format is
36917 \begin_inset space ~
36925 \begin_layout Subsection
36926 View (Other Formats)
36929 \begin_layout Standard
36930 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
36931 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
36932 actual document with an external program.
36933 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
36934 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
36935 All possible formats are listed in section
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36942 reference "sub:Export"
36947 You should at least see the menu entry
36952 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
36953 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
36954 \begin_inset space ~
36958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36960 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36965 \begin_inset Index idx
36968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36969 Reconfiguration of LyX
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
36979 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
36981 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36982 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36984 \begin_inset space ~
36987 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36989 \begin_inset space ~
36992 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37002 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37007 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37010 \begin_layout Subsection
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37020 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37023 \begin_layout Subsection
37024 Update (Other Formats)
37027 \begin_layout Standard
37028 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37029 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37032 \begin_layout Subsection
37033 View Master Document
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37053 \begin_inset space ~
37058 manual for more information on this topic).
37059 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37060 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37068 \begin_inset space ~
37073 generates the output of the whole book, while
37077 will just output the chapter alone.
37080 \begin_layout Standard
37081 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37082 in the document settings (menu
37084 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37085 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37086 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37098 \begin_inset space ~
37102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37104 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37108 ) or in the preferences (menu
37110 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37111 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37116 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37118 \begin_inset space ~
37121 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37123 \begin_inset space ~
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37133 \begin_inset space ~
37137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37139 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37146 \begin_layout Subsection
37147 Update Master Document
37150 \begin_layout Standard
37151 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37172 manual for more information on this topic).
37173 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37174 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37177 \begin_layout Standard
37178 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37179 in the document settings (menu
37181 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37182 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37183 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37185 \begin_inset space ~
37189 \begin_inset space ~
37195 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37201 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37205 ) or in the preferences (menu
37207 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37208 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37210 \begin_inset space ~
37213 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37215 \begin_inset space ~
37218 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37220 \begin_inset space ~
37224 \begin_inset space ~
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37236 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37243 \begin_layout Subsection
37247 \begin_layout Standard
37248 Un/compresses the current document.
37251 \begin_layout Subsection
37255 \begin_layout Standard
37256 The document settings are described in appendix
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37263 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37270 \begin_layout Section
37272 \begin_inset Index idx
37275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37284 \begin_layout Subsection
37288 \begin_layout Standard
37289 Spell checking is explained in section
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37296 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37303 \begin_layout Subsection
37307 \begin_layout Standard
37308 The thesaurus is described in section
37309 \begin_inset space ~
37313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37315 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37322 \begin_layout Subsection
37324 \begin_inset Index idx
37327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37334 \begin_inset Index idx
37337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37346 \begin_layout Standard
37347 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37348 the highlighted document part.
37351 \begin_layout Subsection
37356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37364 \begin_inset Index idx
37367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37376 \begin_layout Standard
37377 Generates with the help of the program
37381 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37382 This feature is not available on Windows.
37385 \begin_layout Subsection
37390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37398 \begin_inset Index idx
37401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37410 \begin_layout Standard
37411 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37416 \begin_inset space ~
37421 to see the full filename paths.
37424 \begin_layout Subsection
37426 \begin_inset Index idx
37429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37438 \begin_layout Standard
37439 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37440 \begin_inset space ~
37444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37446 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37453 \begin_layout Subsection
37455 \begin_inset Index idx
37458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37459 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37470 Reconfiguration of LyX
37474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37487 \begin_inset Index idx
37490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37491 Reconfiguration of LyX
37499 \begin_layout Standard
37500 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37501 needs; see also section
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37508 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37515 \begin_layout Subsection
37519 \begin_layout Standard
37524 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37525 \begin_inset space ~
37529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37531 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37538 \begin_layout Section
37540 \begin_inset Index idx
37543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37552 \begin_layout Standard
37553 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37555 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37563 \begin_inset space ~
37568 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37569 found by LyX (see also section
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37576 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37583 \begin_layout Standard
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37603 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
37607 \begin_layout Section
37609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37611 name "sec:Toolbars"
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
37620 \begin_inset space ~
37624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37626 reference "sub:Toolbars"
37633 \begin_layout Standard
37634 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
37635 This is described in the
37637 Additional Features
37642 \begin_layout Subsection
37644 \begin_inset Index idx
37647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37656 \begin_layout Standard
37657 \begin_inset Graphics
37658 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
37666 \begin_layout Standard
37667 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37673 \begin_layout Standard
37674 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37691 \begin_inset Note Note
37694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37695 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
37700 manual for more information.
37708 \begin_layout Standard
37709 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37715 \begin_layout Standard
37716 \begin_inset Tabular
37717 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
37718 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37719 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37720 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
37722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37726 \begin_inset Graphics
37727 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
37737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37741 pull-down box for the environments
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37755 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
37761 \begin_layout Standard
37763 \begin_inset Tabular
37764 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
37765 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37766 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37767 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37821 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37851 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37867 arg "dialog-show print"
37875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37881 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37897 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37911 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37941 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37971 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38001 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38031 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38061 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38077 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38091 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38093 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38117 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38131 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38159 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38173 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38174 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38181 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38202 Emphasize text, function of the
38204 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38206 \begin_inset space ~
38209 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38239 Set text to noun style, function of the
38241 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38243 \begin_inset space ~
38246 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38264 arg "textstyle-apply"
38272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38276 Format text using the current settings in the
38278 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38280 \begin_inset space ~
38283 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38292 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38315 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38316 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38318 \begin_inset space ~
38327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38336 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38350 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38357 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38364 arg "tabular-insert"
38372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38378 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38385 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38406 Toggle outline window on/off,
38408 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38436 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38476 \begin_layout Subsection
38478 \begin_inset Index idx
38481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 \begin_layout Standard
38491 \begin_inset Graphics
38492 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38500 \begin_layout Standard
38501 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38507 \begin_layout Standard
38508 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38512 \begin_layout Standard
38513 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38519 \begin_layout Standard
38520 \begin_inset Tabular
38521 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38522 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38523 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38524 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 arg "layout Enumerate"
38569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38588 arg "layout Itemize"
38596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 arg "layout Description"
38650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38669 arg "depth-increment"
38677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38683 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38685 \begin_inset space ~
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38707 arg "depth-decrement"
38715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38721 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38723 \begin_inset space ~
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38745 arg "float-insert figure"
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38759 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38760 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 arg "float-insert table"
38784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38790 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38791 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38837 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
38845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38851 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38858 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38867 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38888 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38911 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38913 \begin_inset space ~
38922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38931 arg "nomencl-insert"
38939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38945 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38947 \begin_inset space ~
38956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38965 arg "footnote-insert"
38973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39043 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39044 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 \begin_inset space ~
39066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39075 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39089 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39119 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 \begin_inset space ~
39175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39184 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39198 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39199 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39215 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39229 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39230 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39232 \begin_inset space ~
39241 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39250 arg "dialog-show character"
39258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39264 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39266 \begin_inset space ~
39269 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39285 arg "layout-paragraph"
39293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39299 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39319 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39333 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39347 \begin_layout Subsection
39348 View/Update Toolbar
39349 \begin_inset Index idx
39352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 Toolbar ! View / Update
39361 \begin_layout Standard
39362 \begin_inset Graphics
39363 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39370 \begin_layout Standard
39371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39377 \begin_layout Standard
39378 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39382 \begin_layout Standard
39383 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39389 \begin_layout Standard
39390 \begin_inset Tabular
39391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39392 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39393 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39394 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39434 arg "buffer-update"
39442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39448 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39455 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 arg "master-buffer-view"
39472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39478 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39480 \begin_inset space ~
39489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39498 arg "master-buffer-update"
39506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39512 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39514 \begin_inset space ~
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39536 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39550 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39551 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39552 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39553 Synchronize with Output
39559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39564 \begin_inset Graphics
39565 filename ../images/view-others.png
39567 groupId toolbarbuttons
39578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39584 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39585 View (Other Formats)
39591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39596 \begin_inset Graphics
39597 filename ../images/update-others.png
39599 groupId toolbarbuttons
39608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39614 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39615 Update (Other Formats)
39628 \begin_layout Standard
39629 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
39633 \begin_layout Subsection
39637 \begin_layout Standard
39638 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
39639 \begin_inset space ~
39643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39645 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39649 , the table toolbar
39650 \begin_inset Index idx
39653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39667 manual and the math macro toolbar
39668 \begin_inset Index idx
39671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39684 \begin_layout Chapter
39685 The Document Settings
39686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39688 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
39693 \begin_inset Index idx
39696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39697 Document ! Settings
39705 \begin_layout Standard
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39714 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
39715 is called with the menu
39717 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39721 You can save your document settings as default with the
39723 Save as Document Defaults
39725 button in any dialog.
39726 This will create a template named
39730 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
39734 \begin_layout Standard
39739 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
39740 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
39745 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
39746 to find the one you are looking for.
39747 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
39748 the submenus of the dialog.
39750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39754 \begin_inset space \space{}
39758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39765 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
39766 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
39767 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
39770 \begin_layout Section
39774 \begin_layout Standard
39775 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
39777 Document classes are described in section
39778 \begin_inset space ~
39782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39784 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
39792 \begin_layout Standard
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39801 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
39805 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
39806 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
39808 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
39817 \begin_layout Standard
39818 Some classes use special class options by default.
39819 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
39823 and you can decide to use them or not.
39824 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
39825 recommended you leave them untouched.
39830 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
39835 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
39836 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39842 When you want to use one of the following drivers
39843 \begin_inset Newline newline
39848 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
39851 \begin_inset Newline newline
39854 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
39860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39862 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
39874 \begin_layout Standard
39879 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
39880 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
39881 document is opened without its master.
39882 This way child documents are always compilable.
39883 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39898 \begin_layout Standard
39899 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
39909 \begin_inset Index idx
39912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39913 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
39919 \begin_inset Index idx
39922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39923 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
39928 for cross-references, see section
39929 \begin_inset space ~
39933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39935 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39942 \begin_layout Section
39946 \begin_layout Standard
39947 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
39948 Please refer to the section
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39959 \begin_inset space ~
39964 manual for details.
39967 \begin_layout Section
39971 \begin_layout Standard
39972 Modules are explained in section
39973 \begin_inset space ~
39977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39979 reference "sub:Modules"
39986 \begin_layout Section
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39998 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40005 \begin_layout Section
40009 \begin_layout Standard
40010 The document font settings are described in section
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40017 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40024 \begin_layout Section
40028 \begin_layout Standard
40029 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40041 \begin_inset space ~
40046 and whether it should be a
40049 \begin_inset space ~
40054 can also be specified here.
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40058 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40060 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40062 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40065 \begin_layout Section
40069 \begin_layout Standard
40070 This dialog is described in sections
40071 \begin_inset space ~
40075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40077 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40084 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40091 \begin_layout Section
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40096 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40103 reference "sub:Margins"
40110 \begin_layout Section
40112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40114 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40119 \begin_inset Index idx
40122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40123 Language ! Encoding
40131 \begin_layout Standard
40132 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40133 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40134 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40135 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40136 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40137 known for a particular character).
40141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40142 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40147 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40152 manual for details.
40160 \begin_layout Standard
40161 If you use the option
40165 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40166 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40167 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40168 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40169 exactly one encoding.
40170 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40173 \begin_layout Standard
40174 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40175 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40176 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40177 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40178 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40179 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40184 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40185 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40186 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40187 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40188 engines to standard LaTeX.
40189 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40190 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40231 \begin_inset space ~
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40243 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40248 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40252 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40255 \begin_layout Standard
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40264 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40274 The possible settings are:
40277 \begin_layout Description
40278 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40280 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40281 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40285 \begin_inset space ~
40289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40291 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40298 \begin_layout Description
40299 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40300 format you will use.
40301 In many cases this will be
40306 \begin_inset Index idx
40309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40310 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40316 If the newer package
40321 \begin_inset Index idx
40324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40325 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40330 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40331 this package will be used instead of
40338 \begin_layout Description
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40351 would be more appropriate.
40354 \begin_layout Description
40355 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40356 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40360 (for German texts), type in
40363 \begin_inset Newline newline
40368 usepackage{ngerman}
40371 \begin_layout Description
40372 None will not use a language package.
40373 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40376 \begin_layout Standard
40377 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40380 \begin_layout Description
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40390 \begin_inset space ~
40397 , but the LaTeX-package
40402 \begin_inset Index idx
40405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40406 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40412 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40413 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40414 languages in TeX code.
40417 \begin_layout Description
40418 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40419 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40420 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40423 \begin_layout Description
40425 \begin_inset space ~
40429 \begin_inset space ~
40432 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40435 \begin_layout Description
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset space ~
40444 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40447 \begin_layout Description
40449 \begin_inset space ~
40452 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40455 \begin_layout Description
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40464 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40465 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40468 \begin_layout Description
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40474 \begin_inset space ~
40477 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40481 \begin_layout Description
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40490 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40491 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40494 \begin_layout Description
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40507 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40508 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_layout Description
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40527 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40528 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40531 \begin_layout Description
40533 \begin_inset space ~
40537 \begin_inset space ~
40540 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40541 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40542 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40543 \begin_inset space ~
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40553 \begin_layout Description
40555 \begin_inset space ~
40559 \begin_inset space ~
40562 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40563 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40564 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40565 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40566 \begin_inset space ~
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40576 \begin_layout Description
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40585 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40588 \begin_layout Description
40590 \begin_inset space ~
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40597 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40600 \begin_layout Description
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40606 \begin_inset space ~
40609 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
40612 \begin_layout Description
40614 \begin_inset space ~
40617 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
40620 \begin_layout Description
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40625 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
40628 \begin_layout Description
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40637 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
40640 \begin_layout Description
40642 \begin_inset space ~
40646 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_layout Description
40654 \begin_inset space ~
40658 \begin_inset space ~
40661 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
40664 \begin_layout Description
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40670 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_layout Description
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset space ~
40685 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40690 \begin_inset Index idx
40693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40694 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40699 , when using this, set the document language to
40704 \begin_layout Description
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40710 \begin_inset space ~
40713 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40717 , when using this, set the document language to
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_layout Description
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40735 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40740 \begin_inset Index idx
40743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40744 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
40749 , when using this, set the document language to
40754 \begin_layout Description
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset space ~
40763 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40767 , when using this, set the document language to
40772 \begin_layout Description
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40778 \begin_inset space ~
40781 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
40785 , when using this, set the document language to
40790 \begin_layout Description
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40795 (EUC-KR) for Korean
40798 \begin_layout Description
40800 \begin_inset space ~
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40808 \begin_inset space ~
40811 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
40814 \begin_layout Description
40816 \begin_inset space ~
40820 \begin_inset space ~
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40827 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
40828 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
40829 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
40832 \begin_layout Description
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40838 \begin_inset space ~
40844 \begin_layout Description
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40853 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
40854 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
40857 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40866 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
40871 \begin_inset Index idx
40874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40875 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
40880 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
40883 \begin_layout Description
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40892 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
40900 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
40905 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
40907 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
40910 \begin_layout Description
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset space ~
40919 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40924 \begin_inset Index idx
40927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40928 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
40933 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
40936 \begin_layout Description
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40941 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
40946 \begin_inset Index idx
40949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40950 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40956 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
40960 \begin_layout Description
40962 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_inset space ~
40973 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40980 \begin_layout Description
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_inset space ~
40990 \begin_inset space ~
40993 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
40994 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40995 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40999 \begin_layout Description
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41012 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41013 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41016 \begin_layout Section
41018 \begin_inset Index idx
41021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41028 \begin_inset Index idx
41031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41038 \begin_inset Index idx
41041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41042 Color ! Shaded boxes
41048 \begin_inset Index idx
41051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41052 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41060 \begin_layout Standard
41061 Here you can alter the font color for the
41065 (default: black), for
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41073 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41077 (default: white) and for
41080 \begin_inset space ~
41090 sets the color back to the default.
41093 \begin_layout Standard
41094 Clicking any button showing
41102 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41103 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41104 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41105 later more quickly.
41108 \begin_layout Standard
41109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41113 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41118 out note appears blue in the output.)
41126 \begin_layout Standard
41127 Note, if you change the
41130 \begin_inset space ~
41135 font color and use the option
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41143 in the document settings under
41146 \begin_inset space ~
41151 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41158 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41165 \begin_layout Standard
41166 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41172 \begin_layout Standard
41176 \begin_inset space ~
41185 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41190 Code after a forced page break:
41193 \begin_layout Itemize
41194 For the page color:
41195 \begin_inset Newline newline
41202 pagecolor{color name}
41205 \begin_layout Itemize
41206 For the text color:
41207 \begin_inset Newline newline
41217 \begin_layout Standard
41218 You are restricted to one of
41254 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41267 \begin_inset Newline newline
41270 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41271 names to refer to them:
41274 \begin_layout Itemize
41280 \begin_inset Newline newline
41285 page_backgroundcolor
41288 \begin_layout Itemize
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41298 \begin_inset Newline newline
41306 \begin_layout Itemize
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset Newline newline
41324 \begin_layout Itemize
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41334 \begin_inset Newline newline
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41343 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41347 Cells of the Embedded
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41354 \begin_layout Section
41358 \begin_layout Standard
41359 Here you can adjust the
41363 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41367 as described in section
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41374 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41381 \begin_layout Section
41385 \begin_layout Standard
41386 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41391 \begin_inset Index idx
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41395 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41405 \begin_inset Index idx
41408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41417 Sectioned bibliography
41419 using the LaTeX package
41424 \begin_inset Index idx
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41428 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41433 and you can select a
41437 for the generation of the bibliography.
41438 For a further description see section
41439 \begin_inset space ~
41443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41445 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41452 \begin_layout Section
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41457 Here you can define the
41461 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41469 reference "sec:Index"
41476 \begin_layout Section
41480 \begin_layout Standard
41481 The PDF properties are explained in section
41482 \begin_inset space ~
41486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41488 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41495 \begin_layout Section
41499 \begin_layout Standard
41500 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41505 \begin_inset Index idx
41508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41519 \begin_inset Index idx
41522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41533 \begin_inset Index idx
41536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41537 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41547 \begin_inset Index idx
41550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41556 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41559 \begin_layout Description
41560 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41561 ensure that you have enabled
41564 \begin_inset space ~
41572 \begin_layout Description
41573 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41576 \begin_inset space ~
41588 \begin_layout Description
41589 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41600 \begin_layout Description
41601 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41603 Chemical Symbols and Equations
41612 \begin_layout Section
41616 \begin_layout Standard
41617 The float placement options are described in the section
41620 \begin_inset space ~
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41636 \begin_layout Section
41640 \begin_layout Standard
41641 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
41643 Program Code Listings
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41656 \begin_layout Section
41660 \begin_layout Standard
41661 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
41669 set to be used and set the
41674 The itemize environment is described in section
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41681 reference "sec:Itemize"
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41689 You can furthermore specify a
41692 \begin_inset space ~
41697 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
41698 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
41705 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
41707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41711 \begin_inset space \space{}
41715 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
41725 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
41726 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
41729 \begin_layout Standard
41730 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41738 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
41741 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41742 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41750 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
41754 usepackage{textcomp}
41757 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
41761 usepackage{amssymb}
41771 \begin_layout Section
41775 \begin_layout Standard
41776 Branches are described in section
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41783 reference "sec:Branches"
41790 \begin_layout Section
41792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41794 name "sec:Doc-Output"
41801 \begin_layout Standard
41802 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
41805 \begin_layout Description
41807 \begin_inset space ~
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41814 Format: The format that is used when you enter
41815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41834 View Master Document
41835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41842 Update Master Document
41843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41850 menu or the toolbar.
41851 The default is set in
41853 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41854 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41859 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41869 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41876 \begin_layout Description
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41882 \begin_inset space ~
41885 Output settings for the menu
41887 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41889 \begin_inset space ~
41895 For a detailed description see section
41897 Reverse DVI/PDF search
41902 \begin_inset space ~
41910 \begin_layout Description
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41916 \begin_inset space ~
41919 Options offers settings for the export format
41925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41938 \begin_inset space ~
41943 will assure that the output follows exactly version
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41947 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
41951 \begin_inset space ~
41956 settings are described in detail in section
41958 Math Output in XHTML
41963 \begin_inset space ~
41972 \begin_inset space ~
41976 \begin_inset space ~
41981 is used for the size of equations in the output.
41984 \begin_layout Section
41989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41999 \begin_layout Standard
42000 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42001 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42002 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42003 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42007 \begin_layout Standard
42008 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42015 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42022 \begin_layout Chapter
42028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42030 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42035 \begin_inset Index idx
42038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42047 \begin_layout Standard
42048 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42050 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42054 It has the following submenus.
42057 \begin_layout Section
42061 \begin_layout Subsection
42065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42066 User Interface File
42067 \begin_inset Index idx
42070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42071 Customization ! of toolbars
42077 \begin_inset Index idx
42080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42081 Customization ! of menus
42089 \begin_layout Standard
42090 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42091 interface (ui) file.
42092 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42100 \begin_layout Description
42105 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42108 \begin_layout Description
42115 the menu entries in popup context menus
42118 \begin_layout Description
42123 specifies the toolbar buttons
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42127 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42128 and edit the entries.
42131 \begin_layout Standard
42132 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42144 entries must be finished with an explicit
42169 and in the case of the
42170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42182 The syntax for the entries is:
42185 \begin_layout Standard
42186 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42214 \begin_layout Standard
42216 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42219 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42221 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42242 \begin_layout Standard
42243 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42249 \begin_layout Standard
42250 For example, assuming you use the menu
42252 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42255 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42260 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42284 \begin_layout Standard
42286 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42301 to have the sixth bookmark.
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42313 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42314 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42318 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42329 \begin_layout Standard
42332 Enable tool tips in main work area
42334 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42342 \begin_layout Standard
42345 Restore window layouts and geometries
42347 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42348 in the last LyX session.
42351 \begin_layout Standard
42354 Restore cursor positions
42356 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42363 Load opened files from last session
42365 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42368 \begin_layout Standard
42371 Clear all session information
42373 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42374 of last opened documents, etc.).
42377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42381 name "sub:Backup documents"
42386 \begin_inset Index idx
42389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42398 \begin_layout Standard
42401 Backup original documents when saving
42403 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42404 it was saved the last time.
42405 It is stored in the
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42420 reference "sec:Paths"
42424 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42427 \begin_inset space ~
42433 The backup file has the file extension
42434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42448 \begin_layout Standard
42451 Backup documents, every
42453 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42456 \begin_layout Standard
42459 Save documents compressed by default
42461 always saves files in a compressed format.
42464 \begin_layout Standard
42469 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42472 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42474 \begin_inset space ~
42482 \begin_layout Standard
42485 Open documents in tabs
42487 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42490 \begin_layout Standard
42495 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42507 reference "sec:Paths"
42511 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42517 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42519 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42522 \begin_layout Standard
42525 Single close-tab button
42527 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42530 \begin_inset Graphics
42531 filename ../images/closetab.png
42538 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42539 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42542 \begin_layout Standard
42543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42559 \begin_layout Subsection
42561 \begin_inset Index idx
42564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42573 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42580 \begin_layout Standard
42581 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42584 \begin_layout Standard
42585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42593 This section only deals with the fonts
42598 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42601 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42602 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42613 \begin_layout Standard
42614 By default, LyX uses
42630 (depends on the system) as its
42633 \begin_inset space ~
42649 \begin_layout Standard
42650 You can change the font size with the
42657 \begin_layout Standard
42662 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
42664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42667 points have the size of 1
42668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42672 \begin_inset space ~
42676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42678 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
42683 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
42684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42688 The sizes are explained in detail in section
42689 \begin_inset space ~
42693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42695 reference "sub:Document-Font"
42702 \begin_layout Standard
42705 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
42707 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
42708 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
42709 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
42710 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
42712 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_layout Subsection
42721 \begin_inset Index idx
42724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42731 \begin_inset Index idx
42734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
42745 the list and selecting the
42752 \begin_layout Standard
42753 By checking the option
42757 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
42760 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
42761 \begin_inset space ~
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42770 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
42773 \begin_layout Subsection
42775 \begin_inset Index idx
42778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 \begin_layout Standard
42788 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42796 enables previewing snippets of your document.
42797 This feature is described in section
42798 \begin_inset space ~
42802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42804 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42811 \begin_layout Standard
42812 Checking the option
42815 \begin_inset space ~
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42823 \begin_inset space ~
42828 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
42831 \begin_layout Section
42833 \begin_inset Index idx
42836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42845 \begin_layout Subsection
42849 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42853 \begin_layout Standard
42856 Cursor follows scrollbar
42858 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
42862 \begin_layout Standard
42863 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
42864 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
42865 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
42868 \begin_layout Standard
42871 Scroll below end of document
42873 is self-explanatory.
42876 \begin_layout Standard
42877 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
42884 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
42886 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
42887 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42893 Sort environments alphabetically
42895 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42898 \begin_layout Standard
42901 Group environments by their category
42903 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
42906 \begin_layout Standard
42911 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
42922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
42932 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
42933 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
42937 \begin_layout Subsection
42939 \begin_inset Index idx
42942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 \begin_inset Index idx
42952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42953 Settings ! Shortcuts
42961 \begin_layout Standard
42966 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
42967 Several binding files are available, among them:
42970 \begin_layout Description
42971 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
42974 \begin_layout Description
42975 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
42987 \begin_layout Description
42988 mac.bind a set of bindings for
42991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43005 , and binding files for special languages.
43006 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43011 \begin_inset space \space{}
43015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43023 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43028 Some binding files, like
43032 , only have a limited scope.
43033 When looking at the end of the file
43037 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43044 \begin_inset space ~
43048 \begin_inset space ~
43053 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43054 in the selected key binding file.
43057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43061 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43066 \begin_inset Index idx
43069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43070 Key Bindings ! Editing
43078 \begin_layout Standard
43079 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43080 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43081 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43084 Show key-bindings containing
43087 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43088 Insert there for example as keyword
43089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43096 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43097 functions that contain
43098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43106 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43107 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43111 that you will find in the
43118 \begin_layout Standard
43119 For example, to add the shortcut
43127 , select the function and press the
43132 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43133 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43136 \begin_layout Standard
43137 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43138 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43139 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43140 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43141 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43146 \begin_layout Standard
43147 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43150 \begin_layout Standard
43151 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43153 The syntax of the entries is:
43156 \begin_layout Standard
43162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43180 \begin_layout Subsection
43182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43184 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43189 \begin_inset Index idx
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43199 \begin_inset Index idx
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43203 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43212 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43213 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43214 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43215 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43227 and select the keyboard map file named
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43243 keyboard map and, if you use the
43247 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43250 arg "keymap-primary"
43256 arg "keymap-secondary"
43259 respectively or toggle between them with
43262 arg "keymap-toggle"
43268 \begin_layout Standard
43269 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43277 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43286 \begin_layout Standard
43287 You can also specify the mouse
43289 Wheel scrolling speed
43292 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43296 \begin_layout Standard
43304 \begin_inset space ~
43308 \begin_inset space ~
43313 you can select a key for zooming.
43314 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43317 \begin_layout Subsection
43321 \begin_layout Standard
43322 Input completion is described in section
43323 \begin_inset space ~
43327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43329 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43336 \begin_layout Section
43338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43345 \begin_inset Index idx
43348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 \begin_inset Index idx
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43367 \begin_layout Standard
43368 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43370 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43373 \begin_layout Description
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43378 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43379 It is the default when you
43390 \begin_inset space ~
43398 \begin_layout Description
43400 \begin_inset space ~
43403 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43405 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43419 \begin_layout Description
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43424 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43430 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43434 \begin_inset Newline newline
43438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43450 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43458 \begin_layout Description
43460 \begin_inset space ~
43464 \begin_inset Index idx
43467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43473 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43474 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43481 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43489 will be used to save the backups.
43490 \begin_inset Newline newline
43493 Backup files have the ending
43494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43504 \begin_layout Description
43509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43520 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43521 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43522 \begin_inset Newline newline
43529 You add a BibTeX-database
43534 You can edit this file with the program
43543 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43546 \begin_inset space ~
43552 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43557 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43558 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43564 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43565 \begin_inset Newline newline
43568 The pipe is also used for the
43573 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43579 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43584 \begin_inset Newline newline
43587 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43588 \begin_inset Newline newline
43604 \begin_layout Description
43606 \begin_inset space ~
43609 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
43612 \begin_layout Description
43614 \begin_inset space ~
43617 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
43618 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
43619 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
43622 \begin_layout Description
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43627 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
43633 You only need to specify it if you are using
43637 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
43643 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
43647 \begin_layout Description
43649 \begin_inset space ~
43652 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
43653 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
43654 where to find it on the system.
43655 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
43656 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
43658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43665 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
43666 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
43669 \begin_layout Description
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43674 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
43675 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
43677 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
43679 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
43680 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
43681 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
43682 scanned for the input files.
43683 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
43684 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
43685 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
43686 compilation may fail for some documents.
43689 \begin_layout Section
43693 \begin_layout Standard
43694 Here you can insert your
43703 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
43705 \begin_inset space ~
43709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43711 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43715 , to mark changes you make as yours.
43718 \begin_layout Section
43720 \begin_inset Index idx
43723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43724 Language ! Settings
43730 \begin_inset Index idx
43733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43734 Settings ! Language
43742 \begin_layout Subsection
43744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43746 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
43753 \begin_layout Description
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43762 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
43763 You can find its actual translation status here:
43764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43766 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
43773 \begin_layout Description
43775 \begin_inset space ~
43778 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
43780 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
43781 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
43782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43798 The most widespread language package is
43803 \begin_inset Index idx
43806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43807 LaTeX-packages ! babel
43812 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
43813 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
43814 alternative language package
43819 \begin_inset Index idx
43822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43823 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
43828 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
43829 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
43835 The available selections are described in section
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43842 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
43849 \begin_layout Description
43851 \begin_inset space ~
43854 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
43855 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
43856 An example is the start command
43862 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
43867 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43882 selectlanguage{$$lang}
43887 \begin_layout Description
43889 \begin_inset space ~
43897 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
43898 command toggles the package on and off.
43901 \begin_layout Description
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43907 \begin_inset space ~
43910 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
43914 \begin_layout Description
43916 \begin_inset space ~
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43923 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
43924 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
43925 used by all LaTeX-packages.
43926 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
43933 \begin_layout Description
43935 \begin_inset space ~
43938 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
43940 When this option is not set, the
43943 \begin_inset space ~
43948 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
43949 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43960 \begin_layout Description
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43974 When it is not set, the
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43982 is set to the end of the document.
43985 \begin_layout Description
43987 \begin_inset space ~
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43994 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
43995 language will be underlined in blue.
43998 \begin_layout Description
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44007 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44008 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44011 \begin_layout Description
44013 \begin_inset space ~
44016 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44017 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44018 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44019 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44022 \begin_layout Subsection
44026 \begin_layout Standard
44027 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44034 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44041 \begin_layout Section
44045 \begin_layout Subsection
44049 \begin_layout Description
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44055 \begin_inset space ~
44058 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44061 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44062 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44070 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44073 \begin_layout Description
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44079 \begin_inset Index idx
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44089 \begin_inset Index idx
44092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 Settings ! Date format
44098 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44099 \begin_inset Newline newline
44103 \begin_inset Flex URL
44106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44108 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44114 \begin_inset Newline newline
44117 For example the format
44118 \begin_inset Newline newline
44122 \begin_inset Newline newline
44125 prints the date as day/month/year.
44128 \begin_layout Description
44130 \begin_inset space ~
44134 \begin_inset space ~
44137 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44140 \begin_layout Description
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44145 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44147 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44155 For a detailed description see section
44157 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44162 \begin_inset space ~
44170 \begin_layout Subsection
44172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44179 \begin_inset Index idx
44182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44189 \begin_inset Index idx
44192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44201 \begin_layout Description
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44206 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44211 The name will be used when the
44216 \begin_inset Newline newline
44220 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44228 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44236 \begin_layout Description
44238 \begin_inset space ~
44241 command is the command LyX
44242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44249 LaTeX uses for printing.
44257 \begin_layout Description
44259 \begin_inset space ~
44263 \begin_inset space ~
44266 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44267 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44268 of the program that provides the
44275 \begin_layout Description
44277 \begin_inset space ~
44281 \begin_inset space ~
44285 \begin_inset space ~
44288 printer This option works only for the
44293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44305 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44306 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44309 \begin_layout Subsection
44314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44324 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44329 \begin_inset Index idx
44332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44341 \begin_layout Description
44343 \begin_inset space ~
44350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 \begin_inset space ~
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44365 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44370 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44391 are used for Cyrillic.
44392 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44405 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44406 LyX sets up in the background.
44407 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44410 \begin_layout Description
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44419 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44424 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44427 \begin_layout Description
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44433 \begin_inset space ~
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset space ~
44444 options They only have an effect when the program
44448 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44451 \begin_layout Standard
44452 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44453 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44454 manuals of the applications.
44457 \begin_layout Description
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44462 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44463 \begin_inset space ~
44467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44469 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44476 \begin_layout Description
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44481 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44488 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44495 \begin_layout Description
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44500 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44501 \begin_inset space ~
44505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44507 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44514 \begin_layout Description
44519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44530 command Command for the program
44534 that is described in the section
44540 Additional Features
44545 \begin_layout Standard
44546 There are additionally the following options:
44549 \begin_layout Description
44551 \begin_inset space ~
44555 \begin_inset space ~
44559 \begin_inset space ~
44563 \begin_inset space ~
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44570 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44588 to separate folders.
44589 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44590 \begin_inset Index idx
44593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44600 \begin_inset Index idx
44603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44612 \begin_layout Description
44614 \begin_inset space ~
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44622 \begin_inset space ~
44626 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44637 changes Removes all manually set
44643 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44644 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44646 \begin_inset space ~
44651 dialog when changing the document class.
44654 \begin_layout Section
44656 \begin_inset space ~
44660 \begin_inset Index idx
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44672 \begin_layout Subsection
44674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44676 name "sub:Converters"
44681 \begin_inset Index idx
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44693 \begin_layout Standard
44694 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
44695 from one format to another.
44696 You can modify converters or create new ones.
44697 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
44704 \begin_inset space ~
44709 field and press the
44714 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
44718 \begin_inset space ~
44723 drop-down list, modify the
44727 field and press the
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44737 Converter File Cache
44743 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
44745 Maximum Age (in days
44748 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
44749 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
44752 \begin_layout Standard
44753 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
44754 definition, is described in the section
44765 \begin_layout Subsection
44767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44769 name "sec:File-Formats"
44774 \begin_inset Index idx
44777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44784 \begin_inset Index idx
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44796 \begin_layout Standard
44797 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
44806 programs that should be used for certain formats.
44809 \begin_layout Standard
44810 You can also define the
44812 Default output format
44814 that is used when you use
44816 View, Update, View Master Document
44820 Update Master Document
44826 menu or the toolbar.
44829 \begin_layout Standard
44830 More about formats and their options is described in the section
44841 \begin_layout Standard
44842 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
44843 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
44844 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
44845 This is done by specifying a
44850 More about this is described in the section
44861 \begin_layout Chapter
44862 Units available in LyX
44863 \begin_inset Index idx
44866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44875 name "chap:Units-available-in"
44882 \begin_layout Standard
44884 \begin_inset space ~
44888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44890 reference "tab:Units"
44894 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
44897 \begin_layout Standard
44898 \begin_inset Float table
44904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44905 \begin_inset Caption Standard
44907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44908 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44923 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44931 \begin_inset Tabular
44932 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
44933 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
44934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44935 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 scaled point (65536
45087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45147 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45151 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45202 % of original image width
45209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45416 \begin_layout Chapter
45418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45420 name "chap:Credits"
45427 \begin_layout Standard
45428 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45429 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45432 \begin_layout Itemize
45435 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45438 \begin_layout Itemize
45444 \begin_layout Itemize
45450 \begin_layout Itemize
45456 \begin_layout Itemize
45462 \begin_layout Itemize
45468 \begin_layout Itemize
45474 \begin_layout Itemize
45480 \begin_layout Itemize
45483 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45486 \begin_layout Itemize
45492 \begin_layout Itemize
45498 \begin_layout Itemize
45504 \begin_layout Itemize
45510 \begin_layout Itemize
45516 \begin_layout Itemize
45522 \begin_layout Itemize
45528 \begin_layout Itemize
45534 \begin_layout Itemize
45536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45545 \begin_layout Standard
45546 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45549 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45556 \begin_layout Bibliography
45557 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45558 LatexCommand bibitem
45565 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45568 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45573 \begin_inset Newline newline
45577 \begin_inset Flex URL
45580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45590 \begin_layout Bibliography
45591 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45592 LatexCommand bibitem
45593 key "latexcompanion"
45597 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45599 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45602 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45605 \begin_layout Bibliography
45606 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45607 LatexCommand bibitem
45612 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
45615 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
45618 Addison-Wesley, 2003
45621 \begin_layout Bibliography
45622 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45623 LatexCommand bibitem
45630 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
45633 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
45636 \begin_layout Bibliography
45637 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45638 LatexCommand bibitem
45650 Addison-Wesley, 1984
45653 \begin_layout Bibliography
45654 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45655 LatexCommand bibitem
45661 \begin_inset Newline newline
45665 \begin_inset Flex URL
45668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45670 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
45678 \begin_layout Bibliography
45679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45680 LatexCommand bibitem
45686 \begin_inset Newline newline
45690 \begin_inset Flex URL
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45695 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
45703 \begin_layout Bibliography
45704 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45705 LatexCommand bibitem
45711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45713 name "Documentation"
45714 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
45723 \begin_inset Newline newline
45727 \begin_inset Flex URL
45730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45732 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
45740 \begin_layout Bibliography
45741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45742 LatexCommand bibitem
45748 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45750 name "Documentation"
45751 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
45755 how to use the program
45760 \begin_inset Newline newline
45764 \begin_inset Flex URL
45767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45769 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
45777 \begin_layout Bibliography
45778 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45779 LatexCommand bibitem
45785 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45787 name "Documentation"
45788 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
45797 \begin_inset Newline newline
45801 \begin_inset Flex URL
45804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45806 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
45814 \begin_layout Bibliography
45815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45816 LatexCommand bibitem
45822 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45824 name "Documentation"
45825 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
45834 \begin_inset Newline newline
45838 \begin_inset Flex URL
45841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45843 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
45851 \begin_layout Bibliography
45852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45853 LatexCommand bibitem
45859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45861 name "Documentation"
45862 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
45866 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
45867 \begin_inset Newline newline
45871 \begin_inset Flex URL
45874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45876 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
45884 \begin_layout Bibliography
45885 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45886 LatexCommand bibitem
45892 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45894 name "Documentation"
45895 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
45899 of the LaTeX-package
45904 \begin_inset Index idx
45907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45908 LaTeX-packages ! caption
45914 \begin_inset Newline newline
45918 \begin_inset Flex URL
45921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
45931 \begin_layout Bibliography
45932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45933 LatexCommand bibitem
45939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45941 name "Documentation"
45942 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
45946 of the LaTeX-package
45951 \begin_inset Index idx
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45955 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
45961 \begin_inset Newline newline
45965 \begin_inset Flex URL
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
45978 \begin_layout Bibliography
45979 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45980 LatexCommand bibitem
45986 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45988 name "Documentation"
45989 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
45993 of the LaTeX-package
45998 \begin_inset Index idx
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46002 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46008 \begin_inset Newline newline
46012 \begin_inset Flex URL
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46025 \begin_layout Bibliography
46026 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46027 LatexCommand bibitem
46033 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46035 name "Documentation"
46036 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46040 of the LaTeX-package
46045 \begin_inset Index idx
46048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46055 \begin_inset Newline newline
46059 \begin_inset Flex URL
46062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46064 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46072 \begin_layout Bibliography
46073 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46074 LatexCommand bibitem
46080 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46082 name "Documentation"
46083 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46087 of the LaTeX-package
46092 \begin_inset Index idx
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46096 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46102 \begin_inset Newline newline
46106 \begin_inset Flex URL
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46111 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46119 \begin_layout Bibliography
46120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46121 LatexCommand bibitem
46127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46129 name "Documentation"
46130 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46134 of the LaTeX-package
46139 \begin_inset Index idx
46142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46149 \begin_inset Newline newline
46153 \begin_inset Flex URL
46156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46158 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46166 \begin_layout Bibliography
46167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46168 LatexCommand bibitem
46174 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46176 name "Documentation"
46177 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46181 of the LaTeX-package
46186 \begin_inset Index idx
46189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46190 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46196 \begin_inset Newline newline
46200 \begin_inset Flex URL
46203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46213 \begin_layout Bibliography
46214 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46215 LatexCommand bibitem
46221 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46224 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46228 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46229 \begin_inset Newline newline
46233 \begin_inset Flex URL
46236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46238 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46246 \begin_layout Bibliography
46247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46248 LatexCommand bibitem
46254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46257 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46261 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46262 \begin_inset Newline newline
46266 \begin_inset Flex URL
46269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46279 \begin_layout Bibliography
46280 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46281 LatexCommand bibitem
46287 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46290 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46294 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46295 \begin_inset Newline newline
46299 \begin_inset Flex URL
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46304 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46312 \begin_layout Bibliography
46313 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46314 LatexCommand bibitem
46320 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46323 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46327 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46328 \begin_inset Newline newline
46332 \begin_inset Flex URL
46335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46345 \begin_layout Bibliography
46346 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46347 LatexCommand bibitem
46353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46356 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46360 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46361 \begin_inset Newline newline
46365 \begin_inset Flex URL
46368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46370 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46378 \begin_layout Bibliography
46379 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46380 LatexCommand bibitem
46386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46389 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46393 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46394 \begin_inset Newline newline
46398 \begin_inset Flex URL
46401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46403 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46411 \begin_layout Bibliography
46412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46413 LatexCommand bibitem
46419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46422 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46426 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46427 \begin_inset Newline newline
46431 \begin_inset Flex URL
46434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46436 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46444 \begin_layout Bibliography
46445 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46446 LatexCommand bibitem
46452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46455 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46459 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46460 \begin_inset Newline newline
46464 \begin_inset Flex URL
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46469 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46477 \begin_layout Bibliography
46478 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46479 LatexCommand bibitem
46485 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46488 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46492 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46493 \begin_inset Newline newline
46497 \begin_inset Flex URL
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46502 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46510 \begin_layout Bibliography
46511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46512 LatexCommand bibitem
46518 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46521 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46525 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46526 \begin_inset Newline newline
46530 \begin_inset Flex URL
46533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46535 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46543 \begin_layout Bibliography
46544 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46545 LatexCommand bibitem
46551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46554 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46558 about new features in
46563 \begin_inset Newline newline
46567 \begin_inset Flex URL
46570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46580 \begin_layout Standard
46581 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46615 \begin_inset Note Note
46618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46625 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
46626 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
46627 bibliography is the second one:
46635 \begin_layout Standard
46636 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
46637 LatexCommand bibtex
46638 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
46639 options "biblio/alphadin"
46646 \begin_layout Standard
46647 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
46650 \begin_layout Standard
46651 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
46652 LatexCommand printnomenclature
46658 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
46659 LatexCommand printindex